Lenze L-force HighLine C 8400 Series Reference Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lenze Manuals
  4. Controller
  5. L-force HighLine C 8400 Series
  6. Reference manual

Lenze L-force HighLine C 8400 Series Reference Manual

Inverter drives
Hide thumbs Also See for L-force HighLine C 8400 Series:
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

EDS84AVHCxx
13392048
L-force
Drives
8400
E84AVHCxxxxx
8400 Inverter Drives HighLine C
Reference manual
L

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the L-force HighLine C 8400 Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Lenze L-force HighLine C 8400 Series

Summary of Contents for Lenze L-force HighLine C 8400 Series

  • Page 1 L-force Drives EDS84AVHCxx 13392048 Reference manual 8400 E84AVHCxxxxx 8400 Inverter Drives HighLine C Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 2 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Overview of technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400 Overview of technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400 Project planning, selection & ordering Legend: 8400 hardware manual Printed documentation Catalogue Online documentation (PDF/Engineer online help) Mounting & wiring Abbreviations used: MA 8400 BaseLine/StateLine/HighLine/TopLine BA Operating Instructions...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ......2.3.2 Change parameter settings with PC and Lenze software ....
  • Page 4 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Commissioning ..............Safety instructions with regard to commissioning .
  • Page 5 ........4.3.2 Auto-start option "Inhibit at Lenze setting"....... .
  • Page 6 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Motor control (MCTRL)............. 131 Motor selection/Motor data .
  • Page 7 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Sensorless vector control (SLVC)..........5.7.1 Parameterisation dialog/signal flow .
  • Page 8 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 5.10 Parameterisable additional functions ..........5.10.1 Selection of switching frequency .
  • Page 9 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents I/O terminals ..............309 Digital input terminals .
  • Page 10 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Technology applications ............358 Selection of the technology application and the control mode .
  • Page 11 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents TA "Switch-off positioning" ............7.4.1 Basic signal flow .
  • Page 12 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Basic drive functions (MCK) ............450 Basic signal flow .
  • Page 13 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Manual jog ..............8.7.1 Parameter setting .

  • Page 14: Buy: Www.valinonline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: Customerservice@Valin.com

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 8.12 Holding brake control ............8.12.1 Internal interfaces .
  • Page 15 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Diagnostics & error management ........... 559 Basics on error handling in the controller .
  • Page 16 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents System bus "CAN on board" ............613 10.1 General information .
  • Page 17 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 10.9 Parameter data transfer ............10.9.1 Identifiers of the parameter data objects.
  • Page 18 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Fieldbus interface ..............686 11.1 Process data transfer .
  • Page 19 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents Working with the FB Editor............1009 15.1 Basics .
  • Page 20 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 15.5 Adjusting online and offline interconnection ........1054 15.6 Printing the interconnection .
  • Page 21 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.23 L_Compare_1 ............1096 16.1.23.1 Function 1: nIn1 = nIn2.
  • Page 22 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.51 L_ConvW_1 ............. 1132 16.1.52 L_ConvW_2 .
  • Page 23 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.80 L_DigitalLogic5_1............1192 16.1.81 L_DigitalLogic5_2.
  • Page 24 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.117L_NSet_1............. . . 1238 16.1.117.1Main setpoint path .
  • Page 25 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.142L_PCTRL_1 ............. 1288 16.1.142.1Control characteristic .
  • Page 26 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Contents 16.1.171L_Transient_8 ............1332 16.2 System blocks.

  • Page 27: About This Documentation

    Target group This documentation is directed to all persons who would like to parameterise, configure and diagnose the 8400 HighLine with the Lenze L-force »Engineer« engineering software and the keypad X400. Validity The information in this documentation are valid for the following standard devices:...

  • Page 28: Document History

    Example: This function extension is available from version 02.00.00! Program name » « The Lenze »Engineer« PC software ... Window italics The Message window ... / The Options dialog box... Variable identifier Set bEnable to TRUE to...

  • Page 29: Terminology Used

    Block for a technology application (e.g. actuating drive speed) A technology application is a drive solution based on the experience and know- how of Lenze in which function blocks interconnected to a signal flow form the basis for implementing typical drive tasks.
  • Page 30 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual About this documentation Terminology used Term Meaning Abbreviation for permanently excited synchronous motor Abbreviation for quick stop Abbreviation for Servo Control Service brake The service brake serves to shutdown rotary or translatory masses in motion in a controlled manner.

  • Page 31: Definition Of The Notes Used

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual About this documentation Definition of the notes used Definition of the notes used The following signal words and symbols are used in this documentation to indicate dangers and important information: Safety instructions Layout of the safety instructions: ...

  • Page 32: Introduction: Parameterising The Controller

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller Introduction: Parameterising the controller Being a component of a machine which includes a speed-variable drive system, the controller needs to be adjusted to its drive task. The controller is adjusted by changing parameters which are saved in the memory module.
  • Page 33 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller L-force Engineer L-force EASY Starter Keypad Parameterisation Fieldbus Signal Signal inputs outputs Switch-off positioning Actuating drive speed Setpoint Motion generator Control Kernel ç è Process controller Device Motor control control ...

  • Page 34: Integrated Technology Applications

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller Integrated technology applications Integrated technology applications The following technology applications integrated in the drive controller 8400 HighLine provide the main signal flow for the implementation of a general or a special drive solution: Technology application "Actuating drive speed"...

  • Page 35: Purpose Of The Technology Applications

    On the one hand a great scope of standard drive tasks for frequency inverters is covered by the technology applications offered by Lenze, and on the other hand, the user is relieved from time-consuming programming activities. Some drive tasks are often alike in practice so that minor modifications of the corresponding technology application can quickly lead to success.

  • Page 36: Technology Application = Function Block Interconnection

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller Integrated technology applications 2.1.3 Technology application = function block interconnection In case of the 8400 device version, every technology application is based on a "function block interconnection" (abbr.: "FB interconnection"). Using this FB interconnection, any signal interconnection can be implemented.

  • Page 37: 2.2 Selection Of The Appropriate Commissioning Tool

    Commissioning with PC and L-force »EASY Starter« The L-force »EASY Starter« is a Lenze tool for easy online diagnostics, parameter setting and commissioning of the controller. Commissioning with PC and L-force »Engineer«...

  • Page 38: Overview: Accessories For Commissioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller Selection of the appropriate commissioning tool 2.2.1 Overview: Accessories for commissioning Version Features Product key Keypad X400 Quick access to parameters and operating data EZAEBK1001 • Hot-pluggable • Graphic display with plain texts •...

  • Page 39: General Notes On Parameters

     Moreover, each code has a name and specific attributes, as for example access type (reading, writing), data type, limit values and default setting ("Lenze setting").  For the sake of clarity, some codes contain "subcodes" for saving parameters. This Manual uses a slash "/"...

  • Page 40: Changing The Parameterisation With The Keypad

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller General notes on parameters 2.3.1 Changing the parameterisation with the keypad The keypad is simply plugged on the diagnostic interface X6 ("DIAG") at the front of the standard device. Plugging and unplugging the keypad is possible during operation.
  • Page 41 Execute the function assigned to the function key (see LCD display)  Execute the stop function set in C00469 (Lenze setting: Inhibit controller)  Deactivate stop function again (Lenze setting: Enable controller again)  In the menu level: Select menu/submenu  In the parameter level: Select parameter ...
  • Page 42 Go To Param – Use the function key to return to the SAVE  main menu. Load Lenze setting 2. Use the navigation keys to select the   C00002/001 parameter to be set within a submenu.

  • Page 43: Change Parameter Settings With Pc And Lenze Software

    General notes on parameters 2.3.2 Change parameter settings with PC and Lenze software The USB diagnostic adapter, for instance, can be used for the communication between the PC (including the L-force »EASY Starter« or L-force »Engineer« software) and the controller, see illustration.

  • Page 44: Save Parameter Settings In The Memory Module Safe Against Mains Failure

    General information  In the delivery state, the Lenze setting of the following parameters has been saved to the integrated memory module: – the parameters of the controller –...
  • Page 45 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller General notes on parameters Unplugging the memory module The memory module is hot-pluggable. A removal during operation causes a warning "PS01: No memory module" and should thus be avoided. The behaviour of the device, however, remains unchanged as all parameters are available in the RAM memory after the device has been started.

  • Page 46: User Menu For Quick Access To Frequently Used Parameters

    When a system is installed, parameters must be changed time and again until the system runs satisfactorily. The user menu of a device contains a selection of frequently used parameters to be able to access and change these parameters quickly. Parameter Name Lenze setting C00051 MCTRL: Actual speed value C00053 DC-bus voltage...

  • Page 47: Protection

    Note! If password protection/device personalisation is used: • Let the end customer know that Lenze can only provide limited service in case of devices with access protection. • Lenze cannot modify e.g. a replacement device via special access to make it work with a personalised memory module.

  • Page 48: Password Protection

    After the execution of one of the device commands listed below, this parameter provides the current password status: OFF No password has been set, password protection is not active (Lenze delivery status). ON Password has been set, password protection is active.
  • Page 49 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Introduction: Parameterising the controller Device access protection Activating password protection Password protection is activated by setting a password.  How to set a password: 1. Enter the desired password in C00505/3. • The password can have a maximum length of 16 characters. •...

  • Page 50: Device Personalisation

    ID. If the device personalisation is active, write/read actions between the controller and the memory module are only executed if both components have identical binding IDs. Lenze delivery status: Operation at the customer's site: Impermissible replacement by the end user: No binding ID has been set.
  • Page 51 Device access protection Short overview of the relevant parameters for device personalisation: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00505/2 Binding ID • The binding ID can have a maximum length of 16 characters. • The binding ID may contain the following characters:...

  • Page 52: Unlocking The Controller With A Masterpin

    Lenze setting! • Customised parameterisation will be permanently lost and must be recreated! • The reset to the Lenze setting may lead to unexpected level changes at the I/O terminals (e.g. brake control)! ...

  • Page 53: Commissioning

    "SW" line and can be determined by reading out code C00099. • Restore delivery status: Set code C00002/1 to "1: On / start" to reset all parameter settings of the device to the Lenze setting. This leaves you with a defined device configuration. Load Lenze setting ( 104) ...

  • Page 54: Safety Instructions With Regard To Commissioning

    Safety instructions with regard to motor operation  Danger! • Continuous operation of self-ventilated motors at small field frequencies and rated motor currents is not permissible for thermal reasons! – In the Lenze setting, the Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) is activated. ( 292) – Activate the Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) if necessary.

  • Page 55: Notes On Motor Control

    Commissioning Notes on motor control Notes on motor control In the Lenze setting, the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) as motor control is set in C00006 with a linear characteristic.  V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is a motor control mode for classic frequency inverter applications on the basis of a simple and robust control procedure for the operation of machines with a linear or quadratic load torque characteristic (e.g.

  • Page 56: Preconditions For Commissioning With The "Engineer

    How to obtain/update the L-force »Engineer« software: Download from the Internet: The full version of the »Engineer StateLevel« is provided free of charge. Current software can be found on the Internet in the "Services & Downloads" area under Lenze website. • Requesting the CD You can also request the L-force »Engineer«...

  • Page 57: Trouble-Shooting During Commissioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Trouble-shooting during commissioning Trouble-shooting during commissioning With the »Engineer« trouble during commissioning can be detected and eliminated conveniently. Proceed as follows:  Check whether error messages are displayed in the »Engineer«. – On the Diagnostics tab, relevant actual states of the controller and pending error messages are displayed in a well-arranged visualisation.

  • Page 58: 8400 Commissioning Wizard

    This function extension is supported by the »Engineer« from version 2.15 onwards! The 8400 commissioning wizard provides for a guided commissioning of the controller based on the Lenze setting of the parameters. Then, the parameter settings made can be stored save against mains failure in the controller.

  • Page 59: Commissioning Of The "Actuating Drive Speed" Technology Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application  Note! Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following commissioning steps and switch the device on! Safety instructions with regard to commissioning (...

  • Page 60: Prepare Controller For Commissioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application Saving parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 65) Enable controller and test application ( 65) 3.6.1 Prepare controller for commissioning 1. Power connection wiring –...

  • Page 61: Creating An "Engineer" Project And Going Online

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application 3.6.2 Creating an »Engineer« project and going online  You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help which you can call with [F1]. •...

  • Page 62: Parameterising The Motor Control

    – The motor control parameters, among other things, can be found on the left: 2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control. 3. Adapt the motor control parameters: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency (...

  • Page 63: Parameterising The Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application 3.6.4 Parameterising the application The application parameters can be found on the right side of the Application parameter tab: 1. In the Control mode list field (C00007), select the control mode suitable for the wiring of the terminals.
  • Page 64 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application 4. Adapt the application parameters: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic.

  • Page 65: Saving Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    • Scaling: 10 V ≡ 100 % ≡ reference speed (C00011) HIGH Fixed setpoint 1 (C00039/1) is used as setpoint speed. • Lenze setting: 40 % of the reference speed (C00011) HIGH Fixed setpoint 2 (C00039/2) is used as setpoint speed.
  • Page 66 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application  Note! Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays. ( 560)  Tip! Other control functions in the "Terminal 0" control mode: •...

  • Page 67: Commissioning Of The "Table Positioning" Technology Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application  Note! Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following commissioning steps and switch the device on! Safety instructions with regard to commissioning (...
  • Page 68 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application Commissioning steps Below find a description of the commissioning steps of the "Table positioning" application shown in illustration [3-2]. Please observe the sequence of the steps in the following chapters and follow them through carefully.

  • Page 69: Prepare Controller For Commissioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3.7.1 Prepare controller for commissioning 1. Power connection wiring – Refer to the mounting instructions supplied with the drive controller to find help on how to correctly design the power connections to match the requirements of your device.

  • Page 70: Creating An "Engineer" Project And Going Online

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3.7.2 Creating an »Engineer« project and going online  You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help which you can call with [F1]. •...

  • Page 71: Parameterising The Motor Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3.7.3 Parameterising the motor control 1. Go to Workspace and change to the Application parameters tab. – The motor control parameters, among other things, can be found on the left: 2.

  • Page 72: Parameterising The Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3.7.4 Parameterising the application The application parameters can be found on the right side of the Application parameter tab: 1. Select "Table positioning" in the Application list field (C00005) (if you have not already done so while creating the project).

  • Page 73: Set Machine Parameters

    1. Go to the right side of the Application parameter tab and click the Machine parameter button to change to the Overview  Machine parameter dialog level: 2. Set the machine parameters according to the system constellation at hand. Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Mounting direction: Motor not inverted Inversion if motor mounting is mirrored.

  • Page 74: Set The Position Encoder

    3.7.4.2 Set the position encoder In the Lenze setting, the digital input terminals are configured as "normal" digital inputs. Since in this system constellation DI1 and DI2 are used to connect a two-track position encoder, the function assignment of these two inputs must be changed accordingly.
  • Page 75 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application The Encoder/Feedback system parameterisation dialog will be shown: 3. In the Position encoder selection list field (C00490), select "Encoder signal FreqIn12". 4. Set the number of position encoder increments in the Number of encoder increments at FreqIn12 input field (C00420/1).

  • Page 76: Set Homing

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3.7.4.3 Set homing  Detailed information on the "Homing" operating mode is provided in chapter "Basic drive functions" in subchapter "Homing". ( 494) 1. Click the button (in the "MotionControlKernel"...
  • Page 77 – Background: The load machine can also leave the travel range limit switch. There follows a return to the home position that was set with the positive edge of the travel range limit switch. 5. Set suitable profile parameters for the homing: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit S-ramp time 0.000 s S-ramp time for reference search/homing.

  • Page 78: Enter One Or More Profiles

     Note! In the Lenze setting, the profiles are assigned to certain operating modes, i.e. the selection of a profile also results in a change of operating mode: • If profile 0 is stipulated: Activation of "Speed follower" operating mode •...
  • Page 79 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application 3. Set the profile parameters: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Profile x: Mode absolute Selection of the way in which positioning is to be carried (shortest way)t out.

  • Page 80: Saving Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    If the controller is enabled and the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option is activated in C00142 (Lenze setting) when the mains is connected, the controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchOn" state. To be able to change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must be deactivated first: set terminal X5/RFR to LOW level.
  • Page 81 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application  Note! Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays. ( 560) Homing 1. Requesting the "Homing" operating mode: –...

  • Page 82: Commissioning Of The "Switch-Off Positioning" Technology Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application  Note! Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following commissioning steps and switch the device on! Safety instructions with regard to commissioning (...
  • Page 83 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application Functional principle of a switch-off positioning without pre-switch off In case of the switch-off positioning without pre-switch off shown above, it makes sense to use the "Terminals 2"...

  • Page 84: Prepare Controller For Commissioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application 3.8.1 Prepare controller for commissioning 1. Power connection wiring – Refer to the mounting instructions supplied with the drive controller to find help on how to correctly design the power connections to match the requirements of your device.

  • Page 85: Creating An "Engineer" Project And Going Online

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application 3.8.2 Creating an »Engineer« project and going online  You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help which you can call with [F1]. •...

  • Page 86: Parameterising The Motor Control

    – The motor control parameters, among other things, can be found on the left: 2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control. 3. Adapt the motor control parameters: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency (...

  • Page 87: Parameterising The Application

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application 3.8.4 Parameterising the application The application parameters can be found on the right side of the Application parameter tab: 1. In the Application list field (C00005), select the "Switch-off positioning" application (if you have not already done so while creating the project).
  • Page 88 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application 3. Adapt the application parameters: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic.

  • Page 89: Saving Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    If the controller is enabled and the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option is activated in C00142 (Lenze setting) when the mains is connected, the controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchOn" state. To be able to change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must be deactivated first: set terminal X5/RFR to LOW level.

  • Page 90: Pc Manual Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning PC manual control PC manual control This function extension is available from version 06.00.00 and is supported by the »Engineer« from version 2.13! For test and demonstration purposes, PC manual control can be used to manually control various drive functions via the »Engineer«...
  • Page 91 The online connection between the PC and the controller is monitored by the controller. • If the online connection is interrupted for longer than the set timeout (Lenze setting: 2 s): – Error response "Fault" is triggered, i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill.
  • Page 92 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning PC manual control 4. To acknowledge the note and activate PC manual control: Click the Activate PC manual control button. • The controller is inhibited via device command (C00002/16). • The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed. PC manual control operator dialog On the left-hand side, the PC manual control operator dialog includes several tabs which serve to select various control functions.

  • Page 93: Speed Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning PC manual control 3.9.2 Speed control Via the Speed control tab, simply make the drive rotate in the "Speed follower" operating mode without the need to set control parameters or feedback systems:  How to make the motor rotate in its most basic way: 1.
  • Page 94 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning PC manual control Further functions:  If the Set quick stop (QSP) button is clicked, the motor is braked to a standstill within the deceleration time parameterised in C00105. – Via the Deactivate quick stop (QSP) button, the quick stop can be deactivated. ...

  • Page 95: Set/Reset Home Position

    Click the Set reference button. The current actual position in the machine measuring system now corresponds to the home position set in C01227/2 (Lenze setting: 0.0000 units).  Stop! If you set the reference with the PC manual control, the drive is referenced.

  • Page 96: Manual Jog

    The change to the "Manual jog" mode can be made by selecting the correspondent option on the Positioning tab:  The profile parameters saved in the parameter set for the basic "manual control" function are used: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Speed 1 360.0000 units/s...

  • Page 97: Positioning (Relative Or Absolute)

    (relative or absolute) is made by selecting the corresponding option on the Positioning tab:  The profile parameters saved in the parameter set for the basic "Positioning" function are used: Parameter Lenze setting Info Value Unit Position 360.0000 units Target position or distance to be traversed.
  • Page 98 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Commissioning PC manual control  How to execute a positioning: 1. Select the profile to be travelled (1 ... 15) in the Profile number list field. 2. If the controller is still inhibited, enable the controller via the Enable controller button.

  • Page 99: Device Control (Dctrl)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device control (DCTRL) This chapter provides information on internal device control as well as the device commands which can be executed via the subcodes of C00002.  The device control causes the controller to take defined device statuses. ...
  • Page 100 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL)  How to get to the parameterisation dialog of the device control: 1. In the »Engineer«, go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2. Go to Workspace and change to the Application parameters tab. 3.

  • Page 101: Device Commands (C00002/X)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device commands (C00002/x) Device commands (C00002/x) This chapter describes the device commands which are provided in the subcodes of C00002 and can be carried out using the keypad or, alternatively, the »Engineer« when an online connection has been established.
  • Page 102 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device commands (C00002/x) Activate device command When an online connection has been established, simply use the »Engineer« to activate a device command by selecting the corresponding option from the Parameters tab in C00002/x ("0: off"...
  • Page 103 Short overview of device commands Device commands described in this chapter: C00002 Device command Controller Status information inhibit Subcode: required Load Lenze setting dynamic Load all parameter sets dynamic Save all parameter sets dynamic Enable/Inhibit controller static Activate/Deactivate quick stop...

  • Page 104: Load Lenze Setting

    4.1.1 Load Lenze setting C00002/1 = "1: On / start" device command resets the parameters to the Lenze setting which are saved in the controller firmware.  Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C00002/1 = "6: No access - controller inhibit"...

  • Page 105: Load All Parameter Sets

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device commands (C00002/x) 4.1.2 Load all parameter sets C00002/6 = "1: On / start" device command reloads all parameter settings from the memory module to the controller.  Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C00002/6 = "6: No access - controller inhibit"...

  • Page 106: Save All Parameter Sets

     Tip! • This device command can also be activated via the toolbar icon. • The "Load Lenze setting" device command (C00002/1 = "1: On / start") resets the parameter settings to the delivery status of the device. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011...

  • Page 107: Enable/Inhibit Controller

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device commands (C00002/x) 4.1.4 Enable/Inhibit controller C00002/16 = "1: On / start" device command enables the controller, provided that no other source of a controller inhibit is active. C00002/16 = "0: Off / ready" device command inhibits the controller again, i.e. the power output stages in the controller are inhibited and the speed/current controllers of the motor control are reset.

  • Page 108: Activate/Deactivate Quick Stop

    (n = 0). Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00105 Decel. time - quick stop 2.000 s  The motor is kept at a standstill during closed-loop operation.  A pulse inhibit (CINH) is set if the auto DCB function has been activated via C00019.

  • Page 109: Reset Error

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device commands (C00002/x) 4.1.6 Reset error C00002/19 = "1: On / start" device command acknowledges an existing error message if the error cause has been eliminated and thus the error is no longer pending. ...

  • Page 110: Device Search Function

     The setting C00002/27 = "0: Off / ready" serves to abort or switch off the function.  Adjustable time period: 0 ... 6000 s (Lenze setting: 5 s)  Tip! The device search function can also be activated via the toolbar icon.

  • Page 111: Device State Machine And Device Statuses

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses Device state machine and device statuses The behaviour of the controller is mainly determined by the current device status within the device state machine. Which device status is active and device status is next depends on certain control signals (e.g.

  • Page 112: Firmwareupdate

    Device states, priorities, and meaning of the status bits in the status word 4.2.1 FirmwareUpdate  Note! This function may only be executed by qualified Lenze personnel! Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 113: Init

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.2 Init LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Init The controller is in this status immediately after switching on its 24 V supply voltage.

  • Page 114: Motorident

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.3 MotorIdent LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 MotorIdent The controller has been provided with the "Motor parameter identification"...

  • Page 115: Safetorqueoff

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.4 SafeTorqueOff LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 SafeTorqueOff ...

  • Page 116: Readytoswitchon

    "Trouble", "Fault" or "SafeTorqueOff". • If C00142 activates the autostart option "Inhibit at power-on" (Lenze setting), explicit deactivation of the controller inhibit after mains connection is always required for the controller to change from the "ReadyToSwitchOn" status to the "SwitchedOn" status.

  • Page 117: Switchedon

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.6 SwitchedOn LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 SwitchedON The drive is in this device status if the DC bus voltage is applied and the controller is still inhibited by the user (controller inhibit).

  • Page 118: Operationenabled

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.7 OperationEnabled LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OperationEnabled The drive controller is in this device status if the controller inhibit is deactivated and no error ("Trouble"...

  • Page 119: Troubleqsp

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.8 TroubleQSP LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 TroubleQSP This device status will be active as soon as a monitoring mode responds, the error response "TroubleQSP"...

  • Page 120: Trouble

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.9 Trouble LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Trouble This device status becomes active as soon as a monitoring mode responds for which the error response "Trouble"...

  • Page 121: Fault

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Device state machine and device statuses 4.2.10 Fault LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150) Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Fault This device status will be active as soon as a monitoring mode responds, the error response "Fault"...

  • Page 122: Automatic Restart After Mains Connection/Fault

    Automatic restart after mains connection/fault../Error/undervoltage/loading of the Lenze setting In C00142, the starting performance of the controller after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as a "Trouble" or a "Fault" reset can be parameterised individually: Auto-start option (C00142)
  • Page 123 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... Case 1: No controller enable at mains connection If the controller is not enabled at mains connection, the controller remains in the "SwitchedOn" status. Only with the controller enable, the device changes to the "OperationEnabled"...

  • Page 124: Auto-Start Option "Inhibit At Lenze Setting

    = time required for loading the Lenze setting load [4-2] Example 1: Behaviour with activated auto-start option "Inhibit at Lenze setting" (C00142: Bit 4 = "1") Loading of the Lenze setting not possible since controller inhibit not set. Controller inhibit via signal change by the user...

  • Page 125: Internal Interfaces | "Ls_Driveinterface" System Block

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block The LS_DriveInterface system block displays the device control in the FB Editor. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 126 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block Inputs Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type wCANControl Control word via system bus (CAN) • The controller controlled by a master control (e.g. IPC) receives its control word by C00136/2 | WORD the CANopen system bus interface.
  • Page 127 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block Identifier Value/meaning DIS code | data type bInit TRUE "Init" device state is active BOOL bSafeTorqueOff TRUE "SafeTorqueOff" device state is active BOOL bReady TRUE "SwitchedOn" device state is active BOOL bReadyToSwitchOn TRUE "ReadyToSwitchOn"...

  • Page 128: Wcancontrol/Wmcicontrol Control Words

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block 4.4.1 wCANControl/wMCIControl control words The controller is controlled by a master control (e.g. IPC) via the wCanControl or wMCIControl control word, respectively.  wCANControl: Control word via system bus (CAN) –...

  • Page 129: Wdevicestatusword Status Word

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block Name Function Bit 14 SetFail 1 ≡ Set error (trip set) Bit 15 LenzeSpecific_4 Assignment depends on the selected technology application • See description of the corresponding technology application. ...
  • Page 130 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Device control (DCTRL) Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block Name Status Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 131: Motor Control (Mctrl)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor control (MCTRL) This chapter provides information on the parameter setting of the controller's internal motor control. Topics: Basic settings: Motor selection/Motor data Selecting the control mode Defining current and speed limits Description of the motor control types: V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)

  • Page 132: Motor Selection/Motor Data

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data Motor selection/Motor data The motor data term comprises all parameters that only depend on the motor and that only characterise the electrical behaviour of the machine. The motor data are independent of the application in which the controller and the motor are used.
  • Page 133 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data  Note! Sensorless vector control (SLVC) and sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) in particular requires the motor data parameters to be set. The motor data comprise the data of the motor nameplate and the data of the motor equivalent circuit.
  • Page 134 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data Adapting motor data manually If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, the displayed motor data can exactly be adapted to the real motor by clicking the From project... button and selecting the "Own motor settings"...

  • Page 135: Selecting A Motor From The Motor Catalogue In The "Engineer

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data Parameter Info C00070 SLVC: Vp speed controller C00071 SLVC: Ti speed controller C00075 Vp current controller C00076 Ti current controller C00273 Moment of inertia 5.1.1 Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer« If a checkmark is set in the Motor control field in the "Other components"...
  • Page 136  Tip! If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, select a Lenze motor from the motor catalogue first which is similar in terms of current, voltage and speed rating. Adapt the preselected motor data exactly to the real motor afterwards.

  • Page 137: Automatic Motor Data Identification

    – Duration approx. 80 s  Tip! In the Lenze setting, a setting of "0: automatic" is selected in C02867/1. This setting ensures that the controller automatically selects the optimum procedure for motor parameter identification. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011...
  • Page 138 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data  Danger! During motor parameter identification, the motor is energised via the outputs U, V and W of the controller! Observe the corresponding safety instructions!  Stop! • If motor parameter identification is aborted, unstable drive behaviour may be the result! •...
  • Page 139 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data Preconditions The motor parameters listed in the table below are excluded from automatic identification and must therefore be adapted to the used motor before motor parameter identification is carried out (see motor nameplate). Parameter Info C00081...
  • Page 140 7.00 V/A C00076 Ti current controller 10.61 ms In the Lenze setting, the current controller is preset in such a way that an optimum controller behaviour is obtained for an asynchronous motor with power adaptation to the controller.  Note! The motor parameter identification can be aborted in the following cases: •...
  • Page 141 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Motor selection/Motor data  How to carry out automatic motor parameter identification: 1. Inhibit the controller if it is enabled, e.g. via the C00002/16 device command or a LOW signal at the X5/RFR terminal. •...

  • Page 142: Selecting The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Selecting the control mode Selecting the control mode The 8400 HighLine controller supports various modes for motor control (open loop or closed loop).  V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with linear characteristic for asynchronous motors is preset.
  • Page 143 (C00016) and slip compensation (C00021) required for optimising the drive behaviour are dimensioned for asynchronous motors with power adaptations to the inverter in the Lenze setting. The required motor data (motor rotor resistance, motor stator resistance, motor stator leakage inductance and mutual motor inductance) only affect the extent of energy optimisation but not the stability.
  • Page 144 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Selecting the control mode Sensorless vector control (SLVC) Sensorless (field-oriented) vector control for asynchronous motors is based on a decoupled, separate control for the torque-producing and the field-producing current component. In addition, the actual speed is reconstructed by means of a motor model so that a speed sensor is not required.
  • Page 145 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Selecting the control mode Speed feedback As shown in the following graphics, the drive systems with feedback have, independently of the motor control, more advantages than systems without feedback. V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) 9300vec092 9300vec093...

  • Page 146: Selection Help

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Selecting the control mode 5.2.1 Selection help To ease the selection of the motor control mode, the two following tables contain recommendations and alternatives to standard applications. Application recommended Alternatively Single drives With constant load VFCplus: V/f linear SLVC or SLPSM...

  • Page 147: Defining Current And Speed Limits

    For reasons of achievable resolution and the accuracy involved, the reference speed should be geared to the speed range required for the respective application. Lenze recommendation: Reference speed (C00011) = 1500 ... 3000 rpm Irrespective of the selected motor control, there are more limitation options:...
  • Page 148 In the various motor control modes, the controller is provided with functions which determine the dynamic behaviour under load and counteract exceedance of the maximum current in motor or generator mode. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00022 Imax in motor mode 47.00 A...

  • Page 149: V/F Characteristic Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Defining current and speed limits  How to adapt the peak current limitation: V/f characteristic control (VFCplus): • Reduce the slip compensation with C00021. V/f control (VFCplus + encoder): • Reduce the slip limitation to twice the rated motor slip with C00971. •...

  • Page 150: (Vfcplus)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) In case of the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus), the motor voltage of the inverter is determined by means of a linear or quadratic characteristic depending on the field frequency or motor speed to be generated.

  • Page 151: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.1 Parameterisation dialog/signal flow  Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control: 1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2.
  • Page 152 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00056/2 Actual torque value C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00058 Output frequency C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00006 Motor control C00054...

  • Page 153: Basic Settings

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.2 Basic settings The "Initial commissioning steps" listed in the table below are sufficient for a simple characteristic control.  Detailed information on the individual steps can be found in the following subchapters.

  • Page 154: Defining The V/F Characteristic Shape

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.2.1 Defining the V/f characteristic shape In principle, four different characteristic shapes can be stipulated: 1. Linear V/f characteristic: For drives for a constant, speed-independent load torque. 2.

  • Page 155: Defining Current Limits (Imax Controller)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.2.2 Defining current limits (Imax controller) The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) and the V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) operating modes are provided with a current limitation control which is decisive for the dynamic behaviour under load and counteracts exceedance of the maximum current in motor or generator mode.

  • Page 156: Optimising The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.3 Optimising the control mode The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is generally ready for operation. It can be adapted subsequently by adapting the characteristic and/or the drive behaviour. Adapting characteristic For the linear and quadratic characteristic, it is also possible to match its curve to different load profiles or motors by adapting the V/f base frequency (C00015) and the V...

  • Page 157: Adapting The V/F Base Frequency

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.3.1 Adapting the V/f base frequency The V/f base frequency (C00015) determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable influence on the current, torque, and power performance of the motor. ...
  • Page 158 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)  Note! 87-Hz operation 4-pole asynchronous motors which are designed for a rated frequency of f = 50 Hz in star connection can be operated in delta connection when being constantly excited up to f = 87 Hz.

  • Page 159: Boost

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.3.2 Adapting the Vmin boost The V boost (C00016) of the motor voltage serves to select a load independent magnetising current which is required for asynchronous motors. The torque behaviour of the motor can be optimised by adapting the setting in C00016.
  • Page 160 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)  Note! boost is automatically calculated by the motor parameter identification using the data specified on the motor nameplate so that a no-load current of approx. 0.8 I results at the slip frequency of the machine.

  • Page 161: Optimising The Imax Controller

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.3.3 Optimising the Imax controller Using the Lenze setting of the current limitation controller, the drive is stable: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00073/1 VFC: Vp Imax controller 0.25...

  • Page 162: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

    – The maximally permissible current and the maximum torque are reduced in the field weakening range. – The risk of motor stalling is reduced.  Note! We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz). Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 163: Torque Limitation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.3.5 Torque limitation The previous chapter, "Optimising the Imax controller", describes how the drive can be protected from overload. During commissioning, these settings are carried out once and remain unchanged afterwards.
  • Page 164 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) V/f characteristic control (VFC) The accuracy of the torque limitation is limited because the actual torque (C00056/2) is only calculated from the slip speed measured indirectly via the motor current. V/f control (VFC + encoder) The slip speed of the motor is available at the slip controller output.

  • Page 165: Defining A User-Defined V/F Characteristic

    – Above the maximum and below the minimum frequency, the previous rise is continued until the maximum output voltage.  In the Lenze setting, the 11 grid points represent a linear characteristic. – 3-phase devices: Output voltage 400 V at f = 50 Hz –...
  • Page 166 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)  Tip! Cases of application for this function: • Operation of reluctance motors or synchronous motors during controlled acceleration (reduction of natural frequencies caused by wrong excitation). •...
  • Page 167 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00967/x Frequency interpol. points C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00968/x Voltage interpol. points C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00056/2 Actual torque value...

  • Page 168: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 5.4.4 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour Drive behaviour Remedy Inadequate smooth running at low speeds, especially in Automatic motor data identification ( 137) the case of operation with a long motor cable Problems in case of high starting duty (great mass Adapting the Vmin boost (...

  • Page 169: V/F Characteristic Control - Energy-Saving (Vfcpluseco)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) This function extension is available from version 10.00.00! With the energy-saving V/f characteristic control mode (VFCplusEco), the motor voltage of the inverter is detected by means of a linear characteristic depending on the field frequency to be created or the motor speed.

  • Page 170: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)  Stop! • For adjustment, observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous motor at low output frequencies. – Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be operated for a short time with their rated current in the frequency range 0 Hz ...
  • Page 171 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00910/1 Max. pos. output frequency C00975 VFC-ECO: Vp C00830/4 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00910/2 Max. neg. output frequency C00976 VFC-ECO: Ti C00830/5 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00021 Slip compensation C00977...

  • Page 172: Comparison Of Vfcpluseco - Vfcplus

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) 5.5.2 Comparison of VFCplusEco - VFCplus The following characteristics show the impact of the energy-saving V/f characteristic control (VFCplusEco) compared to the standard V/f characteristic control (VFCplus). ...

  • Page 173: Basic Settings

    "Motor selection/Motor data". ( 132) " chapter. Depending on the motor manufacturer, proceed as follows: Lenze motor: Third party manufacturer's motor: Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the 1. Set the motor nameplate data »Engineer« Automatic motor data identification...

  • Page 174: Optimising The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) 5.5.4 Optimising the control mode The V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplus) is generally ready for operation. It can be adapted subsequently by adapting the characteristic and/or the drive behaviour. Adapting characteristic For the linear characteristic as part of the V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco), it is also possible (like in case of the standard V/f characteristic control) to...

  • Page 175: Changes

    An adaptation of the minimum voltage V/f (C00977) improves the stability in case of load impulses.  In the Lenze setting, the minimum voltage V/f is set to 20 % for the highest energy optimisation. This setting serves to respond to load torques if these amount to approx.

  • Page 176: Adapting The Slope Limitation For Lowering The Eco Function

    (The dynamics when switching off the eco function is reduced) 5.5.4.3 Optimising the cos/phi controller With the Lenze setting, the cosϕ controller is set such that usually no adaptation is required for all power ratings and application cases. Behaviour Remedy/recommendation The cosϕ...

  • Page 177: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) 5.5.5 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour Drive behaviour Remedy Inadequate smooth running at low speeds, especially in Automatic motor data identification ( 137) the case of operation with a long motor cable Reduce the influence of the Eco function by increasing the minimum voltage V/f (C00977).
  • Page 178 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) Drive behaviour Remedy Speed variations in no-load operation and with load for Minimise speed oscillations with increasing the speeds > rated speed. oscillation damping field weakening (C00236). Caution: If C00236 is increased, the maximum output...

  • Page 179: V/F Control (Vfcplus + Encoder)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) The previously described V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) can be operated with a feedback of speed. This bears the following advantages:  Stationary accuracy of speed ...
  • Page 180 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00050 Speed setpoint C00058 Output frequency C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00006 Motor control C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00972 Vp Vf+encoder C00830/26 MCTRL: nBoost_a C00054...

  • Page 181: Basic Settings

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) 5.6.2 Basic settings In order to protect the drive system, carry out the commissioning of the V/f control and the slip regulator in several steps.  Detailed information on the single steps can be found in the following subchapters or in the corresponding subchapters for V/f characteristic control.

  • Page 182: Parameterising The Slip Regulator

     In contrast to the conventional speed controller, the slip regulator only regulates the slip.  In the Lenze setting, the slip regulator features a configuration with a goof robustness and moderate dynamics. Parameter...
  • Page 183 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)  How to adapt the slip regulator gain to the operating conditions: 1. Adapt the slip regulator gain (C00972) to the encoder increment according to table [5-1].
  • Page 184 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) Controller limitation Max. intervention of the controller is limited by the controller limitation (C00971/1).  The controller can be limited depending on the application.  We recommend to limit the max. intervention to twice the rated slip of the motor. ...

  • Page 185: Sensorless Vector Control

    • Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is not permissible for hoists! • The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power-adapted motor. Optimal operation is only possible if either: – the motor is selected via the Lenze motor catalogue –...

  • Page 186: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) In comparison to the V/f characteristic control without feedback, the following can be achieved by means of sensorless vector control SLVC:  A higher maximum torque throughout the entire speed range ...
  • Page 187 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00073/2 SLVC: Vp torque controller C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00022 Imax in motor mode C00084 Motor stator resistance C00105...

  • Page 188: Types Of Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.2 Types of control The sensorless vector control can be operated in two different modes: Speed control with torque limitation (bTorquemodeOn = FALSE)  Torque control with speed limitation (bTorquemodeOn = TRUE) ...

  • Page 189: Speed Control With Torque

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.2.2 Torque control with speed limitation For torque-controlled operation, a torque setpoint is defined in the drive system. Unlike the Speed control with torque limitation, this type of control has a deactivated speed controller and torque limitation.

  • Page 190: Basic Settings

    "Motor selection/Motor data". ( 132) " chapter. Depending on the motor manufacturer, proceed as follows: Lenze motor: Third party manufacturer's motor: Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the 1. Set the motor nameplate data »Engineer« Automatic motor data identification...

  • Page 191: Optimising The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.4 Optimising the control mode 5.7.4.1 Optimising the starting performance after a controller enable After the controller has been enabled, the starting action of the motor is delayed due to the magnetisation of the motor.

  • Page 192: Optimise Speed Controller

    Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.4.2 Optimise speed controller The speed controller is designed as a PI controller.  In the Lenze setting, the configuration of the speed controller provides robustness and moderate dynamics. Parameter Info Lenze setting...
  • Page 193 I component of the PI controller.  Tip! Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time: Ti = 20 ms … 150 ms Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 194: Optimising Dynamic Performance And Field Weakening Behaviour

    5.7.4.3 Optimising dynamic performance and field weakening behaviour In the Lenze setting, the torque controller has been preset in such a way that robust and stable operation with a moderate dynamic response is enabled over the entire speed range. Retrospective optimisation of the controller parameters is not necessary.

  • Page 195: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

    – The maximally permissible current and the maximum torque are reduced in the field weakening range. – The risk of motor stalling is reduced.  Note! We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz). Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 196 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) The following applies to the reset time Ti (C00074/2) <= 15 ms: The reduction of the magnetising current in the field weakening range can be adapted via the override point of field weakening (C00080): C00080 >...

  • Page 197: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.4.5 Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia Setting the total moment of inertia under C00273 provides the optimum torque feedforward control. Depending on the application, an adjustment of the setting under C00273 may be necessary to optimise the response to position/speed setpoint changes by means of the torque feedforward control.
  • Page 198 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC)  How to optimise the torque feedforward control: 1. Run a typical speed profile and record the inputs and outputs of the speed controller with the data logger. •...

  • Page 199: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

    Bit 1 SC_ASM In case of servo control for asynchronous motors: • "0" ≡ Slip calculation from motor nameplate data • "1" ≡ Slip calculation from motor equivalent circuit diagram data (Lenze setting) Bit 2 ... 7 Reserved  Note! In order that the slip can be calculated from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data, the equivalent circuit data (stator resistance, rotor resistance etc.)

  • Page 200: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 5.7.5 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour Drive behaviour Remedy Deviation between no-load current and magnetising Adapt the motor magnetising inductance (C00092) for current or bad speed or torque accuracy. no-load operation.

  • Page 201: Sensorless Control For Synchronous Motors (Slpsm)

    – From version 11.00.00, the rotor displacement angle is identified with every controller enable in the Lenze setting, and thus a jerk in the machine after controller enable can be avoided. Pole position identification without motion (...
  • Page 202 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)  Stop! • The injection of a constant current may cause an unwanted heating of the motor at controlled operation. – We recommend using a temperature feedback via PTC or thermal contact. Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) (...

  • Page 203: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) The sensorless control for synchronous motors has similar advantages for the closed-loop controlled operating range and the servo control (SC) for synchronous motors. Compared to asynchronous motors, there are the following advantages: ...
  • Page 204 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00834/4 MCTRL: dnDeltaPos_p C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00834/5 MCTRL: dnPosSetValue_p C00105...
  • Page 205 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00995/1 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled accelerating current C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00995/2 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled standstill current C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00996/1 SLPSM: Closed-loop controlled switching speed C00018...

  • Page 206: Types Of Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) 5.8.2 Types of control Sensorless control for synchronous motors can only be executed in the "Speed control with torque limitation" (bTorquemodeOn = FALSE) mode. Speed control with torque limitation A speed setpoint is selected and the drive system is operated in a speed-controlled manner.

  • Page 207: Basic Settings

    C00998/1 and C00998/2. • We recommend using the Lenze setting: Filter time rotor position (C00998/1) = 3 ms Filter time actual speed value (C00998/2) = 5 ms • Deviant from this, the following value range can be used: Filter time rotor position (C00998/1) = 2 ...
  • Page 208 Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)  Note! The Lenze settings of the current controller are predefined for a power-adapted motor. For an optimal drive behaviour of a synchronous motor, we recommend to adapt the controller settings. ...

  • Page 209: Optimising The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) 5.8.4 Optimising the control mode The "optimisation steps" given in the table below serve to further optimise the control behaviour of the sensorless control for synchronous motors and adjust it to the concrete application.

  • Page 210: Optimise Current Controller

    An optimisation of the current controller is sensible since the two control parameters gain (C00075) and reset time (C00076) depend on the required maximum current and the set switching frequency. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00075 Vp current controller 7.00 V/A...

  • Page 211: Optimise Speed Controller

    For optimum behaviour, the PID speed controller has to be optimised and the overall mass inertia of the drive train has to be determined.  In the Lenze setting, the configuration of the speed controller provides robustness and moderate dynamics.
  • Page 212 4. Increase Ti (C00071/3) to approx. twice the value.  Tip! Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time: Ti = 20 ms … 150 ms Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 213 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) Using the ramp response for setting the speed controller If the mechanical components cannot be operated at the stability limit, the ramp response can also be used for setting the speed controller. ...
  • Page 214 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)  How to optimise the speed controller setting by means of the ramp response: 1. Run a typical speed profile and record the ramp response of the speed using the data logger.

  • Page 215: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) 5.8.4.3 Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia Setting the total moment of inertia under C00273 provides the optimum torque feedforward control. Depending on the application, an adjustment of the setting under C00273 may be necessary to optimise the response to position/speed setpoint changes by means of the torque feedforward control.
  • Page 216 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)  How to optimise the torque feedforward control: 1. Run a typical speed profile and record the inputs and outputs of the speed controller with the data logger. •...

  • Page 217: Pole Position Identification Without Motion

    10°. The identification takes 1 ... 15 ms, depending on the motor. The function is preset in the Lenze setting so that in the majority of cases no more settings have to be made. In order to obtain the same behaviour as before, the function can be deactivated in C02874.
  • Page 218 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) Optimising the pole position identification  Stop! In case of a too high setting in C02872, an impermissible motor current may occur during pole position identification. In this case, the "Fault" error response occurs and the "ID5: Pole position identification error"...

  • Page 219: Servo Control (Sc)

    • We recommend to select a power-adapted combination of inverter and motor. • The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power-adapted motor. Optimal operation is only possible if either: – the motor is selected via the Lenze motor catalogue –...

  • Page 220: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.1 Parameterisation dialog/signal flow  Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control: 1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2.
  • Page 221 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00834/4 MCTRL: dnDeltaPos_p C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00834/5 MCTRL: dnPosSetValue_p C00105...
  • Page 222 Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00270 SC: Freq. current setpoint filter C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00271 SC: Current setpoint filter width C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00272 SC: Current setpoint filter depth C00079/1...

  • Page 223: Types Of Control

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.2 Types of control The servo control can be operated in two different modes: Speed control with torque limitation (bTorquemodeOn = FALSE)  Torque control with speed limitation (bTorquemodeOn = TRUE) ...

  • Page 224: Torque Control With Speed Limitation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC)  Motor current limitation – A cross current setpoint is calculated from the torque setpoint which is limited depending on the magnetising current, the max. current in motor mode (C00022), and the max.

  • Page 225: Basic Settings

    5. Set the slip compensation (C00021). Slip compensation ( 258)  Note! The Lenze settings of the controller are predefined for a power-adapted standard asynchronous motor. For an optimal drive behaviour, we recommend to adapt the controller settings.  Tip!

  • Page 226: Parameterising The Encoder/Feedback System

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.3.1 Parameterising the encoder/feedback system Required settings: 1. Parameterise the function of the digital inputs 1 and 2 as the encoder input in C00115. 2. Set the encoder increments in C00420/1. 3.

  • Page 227: Optimising The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.4 Optimising the control mode The "optimisation steps" given in the table below serve to further optimise the control behaviour of the servo control and adjust it to the concrete application. ...

  • Page 228: Optimise Current Controller

    An optimisation of the current controller is sensible since the two control parameters gain (C00075) and reset time (C00076) depend on the required maximum current and the set switching frequency. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00075 Vp current controller 7.00 V/A...

  • Page 229: Optimise Speed Controller

    For optimum behaviour, the PID speed controller has to be optimised and the overall mass inertia of the drive train has to be determined.  In the Lenze setting, the configuration of the speed controller provides robustness and moderate dynamics.
  • Page 230 4. Increase Ti (C00071/2) to approx. twice the value.  Tip! Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time: Ti = 20 ms … 150 ms Differential time constant Tdn (rate time) The differential time constant Tdn of the speed controller can be set in C00072.
  • Page 231 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) Using the ramp response for setting the speed controller If the mechanical components cannot be operated at the stability limit, the ramp response can also be used for setting the speed controller. ...
  • Page 232 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC)  How to optimise the speed controller setting by means of the ramp response: 1. Run a typical speed profile and record the ramp response of the speed using the data logger.

  • Page 233: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.4.3 Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia Setting the total moment of inertia under C00273 provides the optimum torque feedforward control. Depending on the application, an adjustment of the setting under C00273 may be necessary to optimise the response to position/speed setpoint changes by means of the torque feedforward control.
  • Page 234 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC)  How to optimise the torque feedforward control: 1. Run a typical speed profile and record the inputs and outputs of the speed controller with the data logger. •...

  • Page 235: Setting The Current Setpoint Filter (Band-Stop Filter)

    To mask out or at least damp these resonant frequencies, a so-called current setpoint filter is integrated into the speed control loop of the controller. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00270 SC: Freq. current setpoint filter 200.0 Hz C00271 SC: Current setpoint filter width 0.0 Hz...

  • Page 236: Adapting The Max. Acceleration Change (Jerk Limitation)

    Hence, sudden torque step changes can be avoided. The entire speed characteristic is smoothed. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00274 SC: Max. change in acceleration 400.0 %/ms In the default setting of 400 %/ms of the max. acceleration change (C00274), jerk limitation is switched off.

  • Page 237: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

    Bit 1 SC_ASM In case of servo control for asynchronous motors: • "0" ≡ Slip calculation from motor nameplate data • "1" ≡ Slip calculation from motor equivalent circuit diagram data (Lenze setting) Bit 2 ... 7 Reserved  Note! In order that the slip can be calculated from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data, the equivalent circuit data (stator resistance, rotor resistance etc.)

  • Page 238: Optimising The Behaviour In The Field Weakening Range

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Servo control (SC) 5.9.4.7 Optimising the behaviour in the field weakening range The behaviour in the field weakening range is influenced by:  the field controller  the field weakening controller ...
  • Page 239 • For an optimal calculation, we recommend to select the motor from the motor catalogue of the »Engineer« first if a Lenze motor is used. Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer«...
  • Page 240 95 % of the maximally possible control voltage is output. Thus, there is a voltage reserve for dynamic load or speed variations. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00577 SC: Vp field weakening controller 0.0010...
  • Page 241 P component of the field weakening controller and speed controller. In the Lenze setting, this function is activated. Depending on the application, this function can be deactivated via C00079/2.
  • Page 242 This function is deactivated in the Lenze setting because the robustness of the drive may decrease in the field weakening range. Possible consequences are slight speed variations.

  • Page 243: Parameterisable Additional Functions

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions 5.10 Parameterisable additional functions 5.10.1 Selection of switching frequency The switching frequency of the inverter that can be selected in C00018 influences the smooth running performance and the noise generation in the connected motor as well as the power losses in the controller.
  • Page 244 "Overtemperature" error and a torquelessly coasting motor. Therefore, if the Lenze setting is selected, the switching frequency is reduced to the next frequency below when the heatsink temperature has risen to 5 °C below the maximally permissible temperature.
  • Page 245 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Limiting the maximum output frequency  Note! If the servo control mode (SC) is selected, the drive assumes the 'maximum current limitation' state if the maximum output frequency (C00910) has been reached.

  • Page 246: Operation With Increased Rated Power

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions 5.10.2 Operation with increased rated power Under the operating conditions described here and under continuous operation, the controller can be operated with a higher power motor (increased rated power). The remaining overload capacity of the drive system (for 60 s/3 s) is reduced accordingly to approx.
  • Page 247 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions All other types of control require the following settings in addition: Parameter Info Required setting C00022 Imax in motor mode higher than rated motor current (max. 160 % rated motor current) C00081 Rated motor power adapt motor data...

  • Page 248: Correction Of The Stator Leakage Inductance

    90 % 100 % [5-21] Saturation characteristic: Inductance referring to the inductance for rated current  When a Lenze motor is selected from the »Engineer« motor catalogue, the saturation characteristic will also be loaded and switched on if required.  The correction by means of this saturation characteristic can be switched on/off via C02859.
  • Page 249 The saturation characteristic is not only used for the correction of the current controller but also influences the current controller feedforward control (C00079/1). Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02853/1...17 Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02855 Imax Lss saturation characteristic 3000.0 A...

  • Page 250: Flying Restart Function

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions 5.10.4 Flying restart function The flying restart circuit for asynchronous motors uses a simple motor model which requires knowledge of the motor stator resistance RS and the rated motor current. ...
  • Page 251 • Every time the controller is enabled, a synchronisation to the rotating or standing drive is carried out. When the Lenze setting is used, most applications do not require additional controller settings. If additional settings are necessary, proceed as follows: 2.
  • Page 252 • We recommend not to change the Lenze setting of the integration time. • When special motor are used (e.g. multi-pole motors or ASM servo motors), a reduced integration time may improve the flying restart behaviour.

  • Page 253: Dc-Injection Braking

    DC-injection braking has the advantage that it is possible to influence the braking time by changing the motor current or the braking torque.. Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00019 Auto-DCB: Threshold 3 rpm •...

  • Page 254: Manual Dc-Injection Braking (Dcb)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Method DC-injection braking can be carried out in two ways with different types of activation: Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) 5.10.5.1 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) DC-injection braking can be activated manually for the two technology applications "Actuating drive speed"...
  • Page 255 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Function For understanding the auto DCB function, it is necessary to distinguish between three different types of operation: A. The drive has been enabled and, in the course of operation, the speed setpoint falls below the auto DCB threshold.
  • Page 256 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Auto DCB function during operation with speed feedback  Stop! If the DC-injection braking operation is too long and the braking current or braking voltage is too high, the connected motor may overheat. If you want to use the auto DCB function contrary to our recommendation (see above), the auto DCB threshold must not fall below the following values depending on the number of encoder increments (C00420):...
  • Page 257 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Explanation of the automatic DC-injection braking function by means of two examples motor rotates  ‚ ƒ specified speed. The current adjusts itself to the load, see . C00019 The DC braking current set in C00036...

  • Page 258: Slip Compensation

    ( 185) Under load, the speed of an asynchronous motor decreases. This load-dependent speed drop is called slip. The slip can partly be compensated for by the setting in C00021. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00021 Slip compensation 2.11 % ...
  • Page 259 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions  Tip! The following guide value applies to a correctly set slip compensation: ≤ • Deviation from the rated motor speed 1% for the speed range of 10 % ... 100 % ≤...

  • Page 260: Oscillation Damping

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions 5.10.7 Oscillation damping Mechanical oscillations are undesirable effects in every process and they may have an adverse effect on the single system components and/or the production output. Mechanical oscillations in the form of speed oscillations are suppressed by the oscillation damping function.

  • Page 261: Oscillation Damping Voltage Range

    – At an output frequency of approx. 20 ... 40 Hz, some asynchronous motors can show resonance which causes current and speed variations and thus destabilise the running operation. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00234 Oscillation damping influence 5.00 %...

  • Page 262: Range

    Thus, an adaptation of C00236 is not required in the majority of cases.  Maximum output voltage to be reached with Lenze setting of C00236: – Single-phase devices: 98.2 % – Three-phase devices: 99.7 % ...
  • Page 263 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions  How to eliminate speed oscillations in the field weakening range: 1. Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur. 2. Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C00236 step by step (increment 1).

  • Page 264: Phase Sequence Reversal For Correcting Misconnected Uvw Motor Phases

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions 5.10.8 Phase sequence reversal for correcting misconnected UVW motor phases This function extension is only available from version 04.00.00! If the motor phases are misconnected at the inverter output (e.g. phase u takes the place of phase v), the motor will rotate in the wrong direction.

  • Page 265: Field Weakening For Synchronous Motors

    • Servo control (SC) • Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) (from version 10.00.00) In the Lenze setting, the field weakening for synchronous motors is set in C00079/4. • If a high energy efficiency is required, keep the field weakening switched off or restrict the field weakening operation via C00938.
  • Page 266 C00938 serves to limit the maximally effective field-producing motor current as well.  – In the Lenze setting, the field weakening for synchronous motors is active (C00079/4), but the field-producing motor current is limited via C00938 to 30 % of rated motor current (C00088).
  • Page 267 – If neither field weakening nor open-loop controlled operation are active,e "0.00 A" is displayed.  Note! If a Lenze motor is used: The controller is automatically parameterised so that field weakening operates optimally and the maximally permissible speed is monitored. ...
  • Page 268 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Parameterisable additional functions Example: Voltage increase in the DC bus when field weakening is switched off (For instance by an active setting of the controller inhibit or by tripping a fault or error at high motor speed.) Field weakening Speed n...

  • Page 269: Encoder/Feedback System

    Observe the maximum input frequencies of the digital inputs! – DI1/DI2: max. 100 kHz – DI6/DI7: max. 10 kHz  Note! In the Lenze setting (e.g. when the device is delivered), the open-circuit monitoring of the encoder is activated. Encoder open-circuit monitoring ( 300) ...
  • Page 270 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system  How to get to the parameterisation dialog of the encoder/feedback system: 1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2. Go to Workspace and change to the Application parameters tab. 3.
  • Page 271 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00495 Speed sensor selection No sensor • Source of feedback signal for speed control. C00490 Position encoder selection No sensor •...

  • Page 272: Parameterising Digital Inputs As Encoder Inputs

    Parameterising digital inputs as encoder inputs The function of the digital inputs DI1/DI2 and DI6/DI7 is defined via C00115/1...2. To be able to use the digital inputs as encoder inputs, select 2, 3, or 4 (Lenze recommendation: 2) in C00115/1 or C00115/2, depending on the input terminals used.

  • Page 273: Encoder Evaluation Method

    2: Comb. encoder method Combination of the first two procedures as a function of the speed (recommended procedure) (Lenze setting) • For a high-precision speed measurement suited for encoders with an arbitrary number of increments (4 … 1024 increments). • Low input frequencies at the encoder inputs: The method is used for low-resolution encoders.

  • Page 274: Generation Of The Actual Speed Value

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system 5.11.3 Generation of the actual speed value ...depending on the encoder selection and mounting direction: Speed sensor Position encoder Motor mounting Direction of rotation Actual speed value direction of motor shaft (C00495) (C00490) (nAct_v)

  • Page 275: Encoder With Htl Level At Di1/Di2

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system 5.11.4 Encoder with HTL level at DI1/DI2  Note! At the digital terminals DI1 and DI2, only encoders with HTL level can be used. In spite of the selected operating mode without encoder feedback, the actual speed value (C00051) is calculated if an encoder is connected and "1: Encoder signal FrqIn12"...
  • Page 276 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system Low speeds with edge counting The minimum speed that can be measured and the quantisation error of speed measurement in the edge-counting procedure (C00496 = 3) depend on the scanning time that can be set in C00425/1 and the encoder resolution.

  • Page 277: Encoder With Htl Level At Di6/Di7

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Encoder/feedback system 5.11.5 Encoder with HTL level at DI6/DI7  Note! Single-track evaluation of the digital DI6/DI7 terminals as speed feedback (C0115/2 = 1 or 3) is not possible. Hence, a single-track encoder cannot be used for speed control at the digital DI6 terminal! Low speeds with edge counting The speed measurement is evaluated at the digital terminals DI6/DI7 with the edge-...

  • Page 278: Position Control/Additive Speed Specification

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Position control/additive speed specification 5.12 Position control/additive speed specification In the Lenze setting, the position control is only active with TA "Table positioning".  Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the position control: 1.

  • Page 279: Braking Operation/Brake Energy Management

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management 5.13 Braking operation/brake energy management When electric motors are braked, the kinetic energy of the drive train is fed back into the DC circuit regeneratively. This energy leads to an increase in the DC bus voltage. In order to avoid overvoltage in the DC bus, several different strategies can be used: ...

  • Page 280: Management

    4. Go to the Overview  basic functions dialog box and click the Brake energy management button. Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00173 Mains voltage 3ph 400 V / 1ph 230 V C00175...

  • Page 281: Setting The Voltage Source For Braking Operation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Brake resistor C00133 Brake resistor utilisation C00129 Brake resistance value 39.0 Ohm C00130 Rated brake resistor power 100 W C00131 Thermal capacity - brake resistor 10.0 kWs...

  • Page 282: Selecting The Response To An Increase Of The Dc-Bus Voltage

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management 5.13.2 Selecting the response to an increase of the DC-bus voltage If the brake chopper threshold resulting from C00173 C00174 is exceeded in the DC bus, the reaction selected in C00175 takes place (use of the brake resistor and/or stop of the ramp function generator and/or inverter motor brake).
  • Page 283 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management  Tip! Independent of the selected motor control, all procedures given in C00175 can be used. The actual speed value can optimally follow the speed setpoint when a brake resistor is used.

  • Page 284: Inverter Motor Brake

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management 5.13.2.1 Inverter motor brake This function extension is only available from version 04.00.00! With this braking method, which can be selected as an alternative in C00175, the regenerative energy motor...
  • Page 285 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management Operating mode of the inverter motor brake The ramp function generator is stopped during acceleration. The speed set in C00987 added to the speed setpoint by means of a hysteresis-type 2-point DC bus voltage controller, whereby the sign of the current actual speed is taken into account.
  • Page 286 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00173 Mains voltage 3ph 400V / 1ph 230V C00174 Reduc. brake chopper threshold C00175 Resp. to brake resistor control...

  • Page 287: Avoiding Thermal Overload Of The Brake Resistor

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Braking operation/brake energy management  How to set the "inverter motor brake" function for a maximum acceleration ramp: For V/f characteristic open-loop control/closed-loop control (VFCplus): • Set reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) to approx. 70 V. •...

  • Page 288: Monitoring

     Detailed information on the individual monitoring functions can be found in the following subchapters. Monitoring Response Error message (with activated Lenze setting Configuration monitoring) Device overload monitoring (Ixt) Warning C00604 Motor load monitoring (I2xt)

  • Page 289: Device Overload Monitoring

    Highlighted in grey = display parameter  If the device utilisation reaches the switch-off threshold set in C00123: – The error response set in C00604 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning"). – The "OC5: Ixt overload" error message will be entered into the logbook.

  • Page 290: Motor Load Monitoring (I2Xt)

     If the calculated motor load reaches the motor load setting (C00120): – The error response set in C00606 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning"). – The "OC6: I2xt motor overload" error message will be entered into the logbook.
  • Page 291 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Monitoring I x 100 % I x 100 % I x 100 % C00120 < C00120 = C00120 > t [s] f = 20 Hz f = 0 Hz f > 40 Hz C00054 f: Output frequency t: Release time...

  • Page 292: Motor Temperature Monitoring (Ptc)

    • There is a wire jumper between the terminals X106/T1 and X106/T2 by default. • Lenze three-phase AC motors are provided with a thermal contact on delivery.  If 1.6 kΩ < R < 4 kΩ at the terminals X106/T1 and X106/T2, the monitoring will respond, see functional test below.

  • Page 293: Brake Resistor Monitoring (I2Xt)

    It acts in proportion to the converted braking power.  Danger! In the Lenze setting (C00574 = "0: No Reaction") the response of the monitoring function does not stop the braking process!
  • Page 294 – Resistance value (C00129) – Continuous power (C00130) – Thermal capacity (C00131)  In the Lenze setting these parameters are preset with the corresponding power- adapted Lenze brake resistor. C00133 indicates the calculated utilisation of the brake resistor in [%].

  • Page 295: Motor Phase Failure Monitoring

    5.14.5 Motor phase failure monitoring  Note! In the Lenze setting (C00597 = "0: No response"), the motor phase failure monitoring is not activated! In order to safely detect the failure of a motor phase, a certain motor current must flow for the current sensor system.

  • Page 296: Motor Phse Error Monitoring Before Operation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Monitoring 5.14.6 Motor phse error monitoring before operation This function extension is available from version 11.00.00! This extended motor phase failure monitoring can both detect a phase failure on the basis of test signals and check for the existence of the motor.
  • Page 297 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Monitoring  Note! With automatic brake control: In case of automatic brake control, the brake will only be released if no motor phase failure exists and the magnetisation of the field-oriented control types is completed.

  • Page 298: Mains Phase Failure Monitoring

    C00023 should have a sufficient distance to this limit value.  Note! If a Lenze motor is selected from the catalogue whose plant parameters are transferred into the controller, the settings in C00022 C00023 will automatically be adapted to the selected motor.

  • Page 299: Maximum Torque Monitoring

    If the maximum possible torque C00057 is reached at the motor shaft, the response set in C00608 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "0: No response"). If the activated monitoring is tripped:  The "OT1: Maximum torque reached" error message is entered into the logbook.

  • Page 300: Encoder Open-Circuit Monitoring

    Response to open circuit  If the open-circuit monitoring is tripped: – The error response set in C00586 is activated (Lenze setting: "Fault"). – The "SD3: Open circuit - feedback system" is entered into the Logbook. – The bMctrlEncoderComFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor SB is set to TRUE.

  • Page 301: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Motorinterface

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" 5.15 Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" The LS_MotorInterface system block provides the internal interfaces to the driving machine in the function block editor. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 302 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" Inputs Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type nPosCtrlOutLimit_a Limitation of the position controller output • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) C00830/21 | INT nPosCtrlPAdapt_a...
  • Page 303 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type nVoltageAdd_a Additive voltage impression • An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this process C00830/31 | INT input.
  • Page 304 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type dnMotorRefOffset_p Home position in [increments] • Scaling: 65535 ≡ 1 revolution C00834/6 | DINT bQspOn Quick stop C00833/33 | BOOL FALSE Deactivate quick stop...
  • Page 305 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" Identifier Value/meaning DIS code | data type wMaxMotorSpeed Reference speed (C00011) C00011 | BOOL nOutputSpeedCtrl_a Speed or slip controller output • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) nSpeedCtrlIAct_a Current value of speed controller integrator •...
  • Page 306 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal interfaces | system block "LS_MotorInterface" Identifier Value/meaning DIS code | data type bIdentificationActive "Motor parameter identification active" status signal Automatic motor data identification ( 137) BOOL TRUE Motor parameter identification is active bFlyingSyncActive "Flying restart function active"...

  • Page 307: Internal Status Signals | System Block "Ls_Devicemonitor

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Motor control (MCTRL) Internal status signals | system block "LS_DeviceMonitor" 5.16 Internal status signals | system block "LS_DeviceMonitor" The LS_DeviceMonitor system block provides the status signals of the motor control in the function block editor. ...
  • Page 308 TRUE Max. torque limitation is active BOOL bMctrlFChopReduced TRUE PWM frequency reduction is active BOOL bMctrlIxtOverload TRUE Device utilisation (Ixt) ≥ device utilisation threshold (C00123) • Lenze setting: C00123 = 100 % BOOL nMctrlIxtRate_a Current device utilisation (Ixt) • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %...

  • Page 309: O Terminals

    ( 343)  Note! The input and output terminals of the drive controller have already been functionally assigned in the default setting ("Lenze setting"). The preconfigured assignment depends on the technology application selected in C00005 and the control mode selected in C00007: •...

  • Page 310: Digital Input Terminals

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Digital input terminals The drive controller has 7 parameterisable input terminals (DI1 ... DI7) for detecting digital signals. The RFR control input for enabling the controller is permanently connected to the device control unit.
  • Page 311 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Short overview of parameters for the digital input terminals: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00115/1 Fct. DI 1/2 200kHz 0: DI1(6)=In / DI2(7)=In Change function assignment ( 312) C00115/2 Fct.

  • Page 312: Change Function Assignment

    Digital input  Note! • In the Lenze setting of C00115, the digital input terminals DI1/DI2 and DI6/DI7 have been configured as "normal" digital inputs. • The digital input terminals DI3 ... DI5 are basically designed as "normal" digital inputs.

  • Page 313: Using Di1(6) And Di2(7) As Digital Inputs

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals 6.1.1.1 Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as digital inputs Function assignment 0: DI1(6)=In / DI2(7)=In With this setting in C00115 , the digital input terminals have been configured as "normal" digital inputs.

  • Page 314: Using Di1(6) And Di2(7) As Frequency Inputs

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals 6.1.1.2 Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs General information on using the input terminals as frequency inputs The frequency inputs serve to detect HTL encoders with any number of increments and single-track and two-track signals.
  • Page 315 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Function assignment 1: DI1(6)=FreqIn / DI2(7)=In This setting in C00115 configures the input terminal DI1 or DI6 as frequency input. The input terminal DI2 or DI7 remains configured as "normal" digital input.. Function assignment 2: DI1(6)&DI2(7)=FreqIn (2-track) This setting in C00115...
  • Page 316 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Function assignment 3: DI1(6)=FreqIn / DI2(7)=Direction This setting in C00115 can be used to connect a single-track encoder to terminals DI1/DI2 or DI6/DI7. For this purpose, the rotation speed is evaluated via terminal DI1(6) and the direction of rotation of the encoder (LOW level ≡...
  • Page 317 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Short overview of the parameters for the frequency inputs: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00011 Appl.: Reference speed 1500 rpm Frequency input DI1/DI2 C00115/1 Fct. DI 1/2 200kHz...
  • Page 318 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Internal interfaces to the application  Relevant inputs at LS_DigitalInput system block: Input Information/possible settings Data type Frequency input DI1/DI2 bPosIn12_Load Load angle integrator with starting value and reset status signal BOOL TRUE Angle integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and (from version 06.00.00)

  • Page 319: Using Di1(6) As Counting Input

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals 6.1.1.3 Using DI1(6) as counting input General information on use as a counting input The counting input is used for counting fast edges. A 32-bit counter counts from a parameterisable starting value up to a parameterisable comparison value and then outputs a corresponding status signal.
  • Page 320 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Short overview of parameters for the counting inputs: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Counting input DI1 C00115/1 Fct. DI 1/2 200kHz 0: DI1(6)=In / DI2(7)=In C00621/3 LS_DigitalInput: bCountIn1_Reset...
  • Page 321 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Internal interfaces to the application  Relevant inputs at the LS_DigitalInput system block: Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type Counting input DI1 bCountIn1_ResetCompare Reset status signal "Comparison value reached" BOOL FALSE TRUE The output bCountIn1_Compare is reset to FALSE.
  • Page 322 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Counting behaviour The following temporal characteristic shows the counting process depending on the signals of the interfaces described before: [6-1] Transient characteristic of a quick counter block, sampling cycle = 1 ms ...

  • Page 323: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Digitalinput

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals 6.1.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" The system block LS_DigitalInput maps the digital input terminals in the FB editor.  The internal processing function of the digital DI1/2 and DI6/7 input terminals can be reconfigured inn C00115 if necessary.
  • Page 324 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Inputs Identifier Information/possible settings DIS code | data type Counting input DI1 Using DI1(6) as counting input bCountIn1_ResetCompare Reset status signal "Comparison value reached" BOOL FALSE TRUE The output bCountIn1_Compare is reset to FALSE. bCountIn1_LoadStartValue Load starting value into counter BOOL...
  • Page 325 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Identifier Value/meaning DIS code | data type Counting input DI6 Using DI1(6) as counting input bCountIn1_Compare Status signal "Comparison value reached" BOOL FALSE Current count value < comparison value (C02840/4) TRUE Current count value ≥...

  • Page 326: Output Of The Encoder Position Of The Di1/Di2 Frequency Input

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals 6.1.2.1 Output of the encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input This function extension is available from version 06.00.00! LS_DigitalInput system block has been extended by an integrator function to be able to provide the encoder position.
  • Page 327 Possible settings Info C02844/1 Function 0 Loading with level Load integrator with TRUE level at the bPosIn12_Load input (Lenze setting). 1 Loading with edge Load integrator with FALSE/TRUE edge at the bPosIn12_Load input. 2 Loading with level + reset Load integrator when reaching the comparison value or with TRUE level at the bPosIn12_Load input.
  • Page 328 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals  dnPosIn12_p provides the counter content of the bipolar integrator. – If the counter content exceeds a value of +32767 encoder revolutions (corresponds to +2147483647 incr.), an overflow occurs and the counting process continues at a value of -32768 encoder revolutions.
  • Page 329 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital input terminals Calculation of the output signal The output value at dnPosIn12_p is calculated as per the formula below: dnPosIn12_p [incr.] nFreqIn12_v [rpm] t [s] 65535 [incr./rev.] ⋅ ⋅ t = integration time 16384 ≡...

  • Page 330: Digital Output Terminals

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital output terminals Digital output terminals The drive controller has  three parameterisable output terminals (DO1 ... DO3) for outputting digital signals  a relay output (terminal strip X101),  a (high-current) output for controlling a brake (terminal strip X107). ...
  • Page 331 Indicates that the polarity of the output is LOW active. The polarity can be changed from LOW active to HIGH active by clicking this button. Short overview of parameters for the digital output terminals: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Digital outputs DO1/DO2 C00118 DigOutX: Inversion...

  • Page 332: Internal Interface | System Block "Ls_Digitaloutput

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Digital output terminals 6.2.1 Internal interface | System block "LS_DigitalOutput" The LS_DigitalOutput system block maps the digital output terminals in the FB editor. Input Information/possible settings DIS code | data type bRelay Relay output, potential-free two-way switch C00444/1 | BOOL...

  • Page 333: Analog Terminals

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Analog terminals Analog terminals The analog input terminals together with the analog output terminals are located on the X3 plug connector. Analog input terminals The drive controller has four analog input terminals for detecting two current signals and two voltage signals: ...
  • Page 334 Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the analog input. Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 355) Short overview of parameters for the analog terminals: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog input 1 C00028/1 AIN1: Input voltage...
  • Page 335 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Analog terminals Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog output 1 C00439/1 O1U: Input value (from application) C00439/3 O1I: Input value (from application) C00436/1 O1U: Voltage C00437/1 O1I: Current - mA Analog output 2...

  • Page 336: Parameterising Analog Input

    By clicking on the button on the Terminal assignment tab, you reach the parameterising dialog for the corresponding analog input: Short overview of parameters for the analog inputs: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog input 1 C00034/1 AIN1: Config. 0: -10V..+10V C00026/1 AIN1: Offset 0.00 %...
  • Page 337 Analog terminals Using current input A1I/A2I In the Lenze setting, voltage signals in the range of ± 10 V are evaluated via the A1U and A2U input terminals. If current signals are detected via the A1I or A2I input terminals instead, the selection "1: 0...20mA"...

  • Page 338: Signal Adaptation By Means Of Characteristic

    199.99 %  ‘ Ž ’ -199.99 % [6-4] Characteristic for analog inputs Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00010/1 AIN1: (+y0) = min 0.00 % C00010/2 AIN1: (+x0) = Dead band 1.00 % C00010/3 AIN1: (-y0) = (-min) 0.00 %...
  • Page 339 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Analog terminals  Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the characteristic: 1. Go to the Terminal assignment tab and select the "Analog terminals" entry in the Control connections list field. 2.

  • Page 340: Output

    Terminal assignment tab, you can open the parameterising dialog for the corresponding analog output (here: O1U): Short overview of parameters for the analog outputs: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog output 1 C00434/1 O1U: Gain 100.00 %...

  • Page 341: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Analoginput

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Analog terminals 6.3.3 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_AnalogInput" The LS_AnalogInput system block maps the analog inputs in the FB editor. Output Value/meaning DIS code | data type nIn1_a Analog input 1 •...

  • Page 342: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Analogoutput

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Analog terminals 6.3.4 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_AnalogOutput" The LS_AnalogInput system block maps the analog outputs in the FB editor. Input Information/possible settings DIS code | data type nOut1V_a Analog output 1 (voltage) •...

  • Page 343: Detection

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection Touch probe detection This function extension is available from version 06.00.00! "Touch probe" (TP) in general means quick detection of a position by a quick sensor if the pulse duration of the sensor signal is too short to be detected by a "normal" digital input (scanning time: 1 ms).
  • Page 344 Button Function Open the parameterisation dialog for the selected TP source. Parameter setting ( 345) Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02810/3...7 TPDigIn3 ... TPDigIn7: Edge selection 0: Off Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 345: Parameter Setting

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection 6.4.1 Parameter setting Proceed as follows to open the parameterisation dialog for setting a TP signal source: 1. Go to the Terminal Assignment tab and select "Digital input terminals TouchProbe" in the Control connections list field: 2.
  • Page 346 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection Short overview of the relevant parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02810/3...7 TPDigIn3 ... TPDigIn7: Edge selection 0: Off C02811/3...7 TPDigIn3 ... TPDigIn7: Sensor delay 0 μs C02812/3...7 TPDigIn3 ...
  • Page 347 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection Window start / end Via the two parameters Window start (C02813/x) and Window end (C02814/x), acceptance windows can be set for the DI3 ... DI5 signal sources in which the touch probe signal is accepted.

  • Page 348: Internal Interfaces | "Ls_Touchprobe" System Block

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection 6.4.2 Internal interfaces | "LS_TouchProbe" system block The LS_TouchProbe system block provides the internal interfaces for touch probe detection in the function block editor: Inputs Input Information/possible settings Data type bDisableTPDigIn3...7 DI3 ...

  • Page 349: Application Example: "Position Measurement

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals Touch probe detection 6.4.2.1 Application example: "Position measurement" The touch probe function can be combined with the L_Odometer FB for a position measurement. This FB is able to save position signals to a ring buffer and detect differences between two position signals.

  • Page 350: Configuring Exception Handling Of The Output Terminals

    Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Finally, the following parameters define the value/status that the output terminals are to have when they are decoupled: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00442/1 AOut1_U: Decoupling value 0.00 % C00442/2 AOut2_U: Decoupling value 0.00 %...

  • Page 351: User-Defined Terminal Assignment

    In C00007, control mode "0: Interconnection changed" will be shown.  Tip! First of all, select a Lenze configuration useful for the purpose at hand by going to C00005 and selecting a technology application that matches your drive task and then going to C00007 and selecting an appropriate control mode.

  • Page 352: Source-Destination Principle

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals User-defined terminal assignment 6.6.1 Source-destination principle The I/O configuration of the input and output signals is carried out according to the source/destination principle:  A connection always has a direction and therefore always has a source and a target. ...

  • Page 353: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The Keypad

    The preconfigured assignment of the analog and digital output terminals can be altered by means of the subcodes of C00620 and C00621: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog outputs - terminal assignment C00620/1 LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a (V) 1003: LA_nCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a C00620/39...
  • Page 354 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals User-defined terminal assignment Configuration parameters for the inputs of the technology application The following parameters can be used to change the preconfigured assignment of the application inputs: Parameter Info TA "Actuating drive speed": Configuration parameters (...

  • Page 355: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The "Engineer

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals User-defined terminal assignment 6.6.3 Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« Whereas the configuration parameters referred to have to be parameterised with the keypad, implementation in the »Engineer« is much easier due to the availability of the corresponding dialogs.
  • Page 356 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals User-defined terminal assignment Possibility 2: Change terminal assignment by means of the signal flow shown Procedure: 1. Go to the Application parameters tab. 2. Go to the Application Parameters tab and click on the Signal flow button in order to change to the dialog level Overview ...
  • Page 357 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual I/O terminals User-defined terminal assignment Possibility 3: Change terminal assignment with the FB editor Procedure: 1. Go to the FB Editor tab. 2. Delete the existing interconnection from LS_DigitalInput.bIn2 to LA_NCtrl.bJogSpeed2: 3. Establish a new interconnection from LS_DigitalInput.bIn2 to LA_NCtrl.bJogRamp1: ...

  • Page 358: Technology Applications

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications Technology applications This chapter describes the handling and the functional range of the technology applications available for the 8400 HighLine drive controller. Technology application "Actuating drive speed" This technology application preset in C00005 serves to solve speed-controlled drive tasks, e.g.

  • Page 359: Selection Of The Technology Application And The Control Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications Selection of the technology application and the control mode Selection of the technology application and the control mode The technology application to be used is selected in C00005.  You can select the technology application in the »Engineer« on the Application parameter tab via the Application list field: Different control modes can be selected for every application in C00007.
  • Page 360 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" TA "Actuating drive speed" Features  Pre-configured control modes for terminals and bus control (with predefined process data connection to the fieldbus)  Free configuration of input and output signals ...

  • Page 361: Ta "Actuating Drive Speed

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.1 Basic signal flow [7-1] Signal flow of the technology application "Actuating drive speed"  Main speed setpoint offset and gain (L_OffsetGainP_1)  Motor potentiometer function (L_MPot_1)  Setpoint generator (L_NSet_1) ...
  • Page 362 Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Selection of the main speed setpoint The main speed setpoint is selected in the Lenze setting via the analog input 1.  Offset and gain of this input signal can be adjusted in C00696...

  • Page 363: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Nctrl

    "SwitchedOn" device status. bFailReset Reset error message In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so BOOL that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if the cause for the fault is eliminated).
  • Page 364 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bSetDCBrake Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) • Detailed information on DC-injection braking is provided in the motor control BOOL chapter, subchapter "DC-injection braking".  Note! Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used! Use the basic...
  • Page 365 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type nTorqueMotLim_a Torque limitation in motor mode and in generator mode nTorqueGenLim_a • These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
  • Page 366 Motor potentiometer Alternatively to the input signal nMainSetValue_a, the main setpoint can also be generated by a motor potentiometer function. • In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer function is deactivated. • Activation is possible via C00806 or via the bMPotEnable input.
  • Page 367 Identifier Information/possible settings Data type Process controller • In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deactivated. • The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C00242. • For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL. bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp Activate ramp for influencing factor BOOL FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
  • Page 368 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type GP: GeneralPurpose The following inputs are interconnected with logic/arithmetic functions on application level for free usage. "GeneralPurpose" functions nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a Analog switch: Input signals nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a •...
  • Page 369 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Identifier Value/meaning Data type bDriveFail TRUE Drive controller in error status. • "Fault" device status is active. BOOL bDriveReady TRUE Controller is ready for operation. • "SwitchedOn" device status is active. BOOL •...
  • Page 370 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Identifier Value/meaning Data type MCK basic functions bMBrakeReleaseOut Holding brake control: Trigger signal for the holding brake control switching element via a digital output BOOL • Use bit 0 in C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering.

  • Page 371: Modes

    7.2.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...

  • Page 372: Terminals 0

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.1 Terminals 0 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Fixed setpoint 1/3 Fixed setpoint 2/3 DC brake Direction of rotation CCw Actual speed value X107 DriveReady...

  • Page 373: Terminals 2

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.2 Terminals 2 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Fixed setpoint 1/3 Fixed setpoint 2/3 Quickstop Direction of rotation Ccw Actual speed value X107 DriveReady...

  • Page 374: Terminals 11

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.3 Terminals 11 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Direction of rotation Ccw DC brake active Motor Speed higher Speed lower Actual speed value potentiometer X107...

  • Page 375: Terminal 16

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.4 Terminal 16 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Fixed setpoint 1/3 Fixed setpoint 2/3 Cw rotation quick stop Ccw rotation quick stop Actual speed value X107 DriveReady...

  • Page 376: Keypad

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.5 Keypad Engineer: Keypad: X101 All parameters Par1 8400 HighLineC DriveFail User - Menu Quick commissioning External supply Terminal Go to param 24 V DC Logbook Quick commissioning Keypad Controller enable Quick commissioning...
  • Page 377 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.6 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Controller enable / reset error Actual speed value X107 DriveReady Connection Assignment Connection Assignment X101/NC-NO LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail X5/RFR LA_NCtrl.bFailReset X3/A1U X5/DI1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 X3/A2U...

  • Page 378: Can

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.7 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Additional speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Quickstop Actual speed value X107 DriveReady LP_CanIn1 wCtrl DriveControl wIn2 MainSetValue wIn3...4 LP_CanOut1 wState DriveControlStatus...

  • Page 379: Mci

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.3.8 X101 DriveFail External supply 24 V DC Additional speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Quickstop Actual speed value X107 DriveReady LP_MciIn wCtrl DriveControl wIn2 MainSetValue wIn3...16 LP_MciOut wState DriveControlStatus...

  • Page 380: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.4 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication The fieldbus communication is connected (preconfigured) to the previously selected technology application by selecting the corresponding control mode in C00007:  "30: CAN" for the connection to the system bus (CAN) ...
  • Page 381 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Control word Name Function Bit 14 SetFail 1 ≡ Set error (trip set) Bit 15 SetSpeedCcw 0 ≡ Direction of rotation to the right (Cw) 1 ≡ Direction of rotation to the left (Ccw) Output words Name Assignment...

  • Page 382: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.5 Setting parameters (short overview) Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00012 Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s C00013 Decel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s C00019...
  • Page 383 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00696 L_OffsetGainP_1: Offset 0.00 % C00697 L_OffsetGainP_2: Offset 0.00 % C00698 L_OffsetGainP_3: Offset 0.00 % C00800 L_MPot_1: Upper limit 100.00 % C00801 L_MPot_1: Lower limit -100.00 %...

  • Page 384: Configuration Parameters

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" 7.2.6 Configuration parameters If required, the subcodes of C00700 C00701 serve to change the pre-configured assignment of the application inputs: Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_NCtrl LS_AnalogInput nMainSetValue_a nIn1_a L_Interpolator_1...
  • Page 385 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Configuration parameters for "GeneralPurpose" functions Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_NCtrl GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00830/14 nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C700/9 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a C00830/15 nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a 1006 C700/10 C00833/13 bGPAnalogSwitchSet C701/23 C00338 Out = In1 + In2 C00830/12 nGPArithmetikIn1_a...
  • Page 386 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Actuating drive speed" Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_NCtrl GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2 nGPSignalOut1_a 1009 C00410/2 C00413/3 C00413/4 nGPSignalOut2_a 1010 C00410/3 C00413/5 C00413/6 nGPSignalOut3_a 1011 C00410/4 C00413/7 C00413/8 nGPSignalOut4_a 1012 C00833/4...

  • Page 387: Ta "Table Positioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" TA "Table positioning" Numerous functions for the motion control of a single axis can be executed with the "Table positioning" technology application. For this, the technology application accesses the basic functions implemented in the Motion Control Kernel which are described in detail in the main chapter "Basic drive functions...

  • Page 388: Basic Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.1 Basic signal flow The main element of the technology application is the Motion Control Kernel.  The Motion Control Kernel is controlled via a 32-bit double control word. All motion profiles in the different operating modes can be controlled with this interface.

  • Page 389: Possibilities For The Position Selection

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.1.1 Possibilities for the position selection The following options are available for the selection of different positions: 1. Changeover of profiles 2. Changing the profile position via parameter data (SDO) 3.
  • Page 390 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Possibility 2: Changing the profile position via parameter data (SDO) The parameter data channel of a fieldbus can also be used to change the position in a profile.  The position of the profiles 1 ... 15 are stored in the subcodes 1 ... 15 of the code C01301.

  • Page 391: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Tabpos

    "SwitchedOn" device status. bFailReset Reset error message In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so BOOL that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if the cause for the fault is eliminated).
  • Page 392 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type nTorqueMotLim_a Torque limitation in motor mode and in generator mode nTorqueGenLim_a • These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
  • Page 393 Motor potentiometer Alternatively to the input signal nMainSetValue_a, the main setpoint can also be generated by a motor potentiometer function. • In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer function is deactivated. • Activation is possible via C00806 or via the bMPotEnable input.
  • Page 394 • Only bit 0 ... bit 3 of wMckOperationMode is evaluated. WORD • If an invalid operating mode is selected, the response set in C00595/11 activated (Lenze setting: "Warning"). • The current operating mode is displayed in C01243. Speed follower Homing...
  • Page 395 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type nAccOverride_a Value for Acceleration override • Percentage multiplier for the currently active acceleration. • 16384 ≡ 100 % of the parameterised acceleration of the corresponding operating mode.
  • Page 396 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type wPosProfileMode Override of the positioning mode set in the profile data • Via this input, an override of the positioning mode parameterised in WORD C01300/1...15 for the selected profile is possible.
  • Page 397 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bGPLogicIn1 Binary logic: Input signals bGPLogicIn2 • The logic operation is selected in C00820. bGPLogicIn3 • The result is output at output bGPLogicOut. BOOL nGPCompareIn1_a Analog comparison: Input signals...
  • Page 398 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Value/meaning Data type bDriveReady TRUE Controller is ready for operation. • "SwitchedOn" device status is active. BOOL • The drive is in this device status if the DC bus voltage is applied and the controller is still inhibited by the user (controller inhibit).
  • Page 399 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Value/meaning Data type bHomeDone TRUE Homing has been executed. BOOL bHomePosAvailable TRUE Home position is known. BOOL bProfileDone TRUE Target position from the profile has been approached. BOOL bProfileBusy TRUE Profile positioning is active.
  • Page 400 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Identifier Value/meaning Data type GP: GeneralPurpose The following outputs are interconnected with logic/arithmetic functions on application level for free usage. "GeneralPurpose" functions nGPAnalogSwitchInOut_a Analog switch: Output signal nGPArithmetikOut_a Arithmetic: Output signal nGPMulDivOut_a Multiplication/Division: Output signal bGPDigitalDelayOut...

  • Page 401: Modes

    7.3.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_TabPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...
  • Page 402 Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11 Terminal 16 Keypad Analog output terminals X3/O1U Actual speed value nMotorSpeedAct_a X3/O1I 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X3/O2U Current motor current nMotorCurrent_a X3/O2I 10V ≡ 100% of I (C00022) max_mot Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 403: Terminals 0

    LA_TabPos.bPosExecute X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE Speed follower...

  • Page 404: Terminals 2

    LA_TabPos.bPosExecute X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: Selected profile Activation of operating mode bPosProfileNo_4 bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 (DI4) (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE...

  • Page 405: Terminals 11

    LA_TabPos.bPosExecute X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: Selected profile Activation of operating mode bPosProfileNo_4 bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 (DI4) (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE...

  • Page 406: Terminal 16

    LA_TabPos.bPosExecute X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE Speed follower...

  • Page 407: Keypad

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.3.5 Keypad Engineer: Keypad: X101 All parameters Par1 8400 HighLineC User - Menu Quick commissioning External supply Terminal Go to param 24 V DC Logbook Quick commissioning Keypad Controller enable Quick commissioning SAVE Actual speed value (V)
  • Page 408 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.3.6 X101 External supply 24 V DC Controller enable Actual speed value (V) Actual speed value (I) Act. mot. current val. (V) Act. mot. current val. (I) MBrakeReleaseOut X107 DriveReady Load mechanicals in target position...

  • Page 409: Can

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.3.7 X101 External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable pos. direction Limit switch Actual speed value (V) neg. direction Actual speed value (I) Reference switch status Quickstop Act.

  • Page 410: Mci

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.3.8 X101 External supply 24 V DC Speed setpoint Controller enable pos. direction Limit switch neg. direction Actual speed value (V) Reference switch status Actual speed value (I) Quickstop Act.

  • Page 411: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.4 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication The fieldbus communication is connected (preconfigured) to the previously selected technology application by selecting the corresponding control mode in C00007:  "30: CAN" for the connection to the system bus (CAN) ...
  • Page 412 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Output words Name Assignment Word 1 DriveControlStatus Status word • See table below for bit assignment. Word 2 GPSignalOut1 Analog signal monitor: Output signal 1 • The selection of the signal source to output is executed in C00410/1.

  • Page 413: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" 7.3.5 Setting parameters (short overview) Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00012 Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s C00013 Decel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s C00024 LS_DriveInterface: bNActCompare 0.00 %...
  • Page 414 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_TabPos LS_AnalogInput nMainSetValue_a nIn1_a 16000 C710/5 L_Interpolator_1 L_OffsetGainP_1 nIn2_a 16001 bCurrentErrorIn1 16011 L_MPot_1 nln_a nOut_a bMPotEnable bEnable C711/7 bMPotUp C711/8 bMPotDown bDown C711/9 L_NSet_1 nNSet_a nNOut_a...
  • Page 415 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Configuration parameters for "GeneralPurpose" functions Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_TabPos GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00830/14 nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C710/12 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a C00830/15 nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a 1114 C710/13 C00833/13 bGPAnalogSwitchSet C711/30 C00338 Out = In1 + In2 C00830/12 nGPArithmetikIn1_a...
  • Page 416 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Table positioning" Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_NCtrl GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2 nGPSignalOut1_a 1117 C00410/2 C00413/3 C00413/4 nGPSignalOut2_a 1118 C00410/3 C00413/5 C00413/6 nGPSignalOut3_a 1119 C00410/4 C00413/7 C00413/8 nGPSignalOut4_a 1120 C00833/4 bGPDFlipFlop_InD...

  • Page 417: Ta "Switch-Off Positioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" TA "Switch-off positioning" This technology application is available from version 04.00.00! The basic principle of this technology application is to travel to a switch-off sensor (e.g. a limit switch) in a speed-controlled manner and to stop as close as possible at this position. Unlike other positioning controls, the switch-off positioning neither has a position feedback nor calculates the path in advance.
  • Page 418 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Decision criteria Criteria Switch-off positioning with constant Switch-off positioning with variable load load Operating mode V/f characteristic without speed sensor. Alternatively for large breakaway torques: Use of a sensorless vector control (only applicable for horizontal movements).

  • Page 419: Basic Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.1 Basic signal flow [7-5] Signal flow of the switch-off positioning  Main speed setpoint offset and gain (L_OffsetGainP_1)  Additional speed setpoint offset and gain (L_OffsetGainP_2)  Setpoint generator (L_NSet_1) ...

  • Page 420: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Switchpos

    "SwitchedOn" device status. bFailReset Reset error message In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so BOOL that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if the cause for the fault is eliminated).
  • Page 421 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bSetDCBrake Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) • Detailed information on DC-injection braking is provided in the motor control BOOL chapter, subchapter "DC-injection braking".  Note! Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used! Use the basic "Holding brake...
  • Page 422 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type nTorqueMotLim_a Torque limitation in motor mode and in generator mode nTorqueGenLim_a • These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
  • Page 423 Release/apply brake • In conjunction with the operating mode selected in C02580 BOOL (Lenze setting: "Brake control off"). FALSE Apply brake. • During automatic operation, the internal brake logic controls of the brake. TRUE Release brake manually (forced release).
  • Page 424 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type GP: GeneralPurpose The following inputs are interconnected with logic/arithmetic functions on application level for free usage. "GeneralPurpose" functions nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a Analog switch: Input signals nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a •...
  • Page 425 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Identifier Value/meaning Data type wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word) WORD bDriveFail TRUE Drive controller in error status. • "Fault" device status is active. BOOL bWarningActive TRUE A monitoring in the drive controller, for which the error response "Warning"...
  • Page 426 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Identifier Value/meaning Data type MCK basic functions bMBrakeReleaseOut Holding brake control: Trigger signal for the holding brake control switching element via a digital output BOOL • Use bit 0 in C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering.

  • Page 427: Truth Table For Activating The Pre-Switch Off

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.2.1 Truth table for activating the pre-switch off Input Function Response in the setpoint generator (FB L_NSet) bJogCtrl bJogCtrl InputSel1 InputSel2 FALSE FALSE Pre-switch off inactive No response • The input signal bJogCtrlRfgIn is output directly at output bRfgOut.

  • Page 428: Modes

    7.4.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_SwitchPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...

  • Page 429: Terminals 0

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.1 Terminals 0 X101 External 24 V DC supply Speed setpoint Controller enable Fixed setpoint 1/3 Fixed setpoint 2/3 Reset error Change of direction of rotation Brake released X107 Connection Assignment Connection...

  • Page 430: Terminals 2

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.2 Terminals 2 X101 External 24 V DC supply Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Stop function 1 Stop function 2 CW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 1 CCW rotat.

  • Page 431: Terminals 11

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.3 Terminals 11 X101 External 24 V DC supply Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Stop function 1 Selection: Pre-switch off 1 CW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 1 CCW rotat.

  • Page 432: Terminal 16

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.4 Terminal 16 X101 External 24 V DC supply Speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Fixed setpoint 1/3 Fixed setpoint 2/3 CW rotation - quick stop CCW rotation - quick stop Brake released X107 Connection...

  • Page 433: Keypad

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.5 Keypad X101 External 24 V DC supply Controller enable / reset error Brake released X107 Connection Assignment Connection Assignment X101/NC-NO X5/RFR X3/A1U X5/DI1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 X3/A2I X5/DI4 X3/O1U X5/DI5...
  • Page 434 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.6 X101 External 24 V DC supply Controller enable / reset error Brake released X107 Connection Assignment Connection Assignment X101/NC-NO X5/RFR X3/A1U X5/DI1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 X3/A2I X5/DI4 X3/O1U X5/DI5 X3/O1I...

  • Page 435: Can

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.7 X101 External 24 V DC supply Additional speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Stop function 1 Selection: Pre-switch off 1 Stop function 2 Selection: Pre-switch off 2 Stop function 3 Selection: Pre-switch off 3 Brake released...

  • Page 436: Mci

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.3.8 X101 External 24 V DC supply Additional speed setpoint Controller enable / reset error Stop function 1 Selection: Pre-switch off 1 Stop function 2 Selection: Pre-switch off 2 Stop function 3 Selection: Pre-switch off 3 Brake released...
  • Page 437 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.4 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication The fieldbus communication is connected (preconfigured) to the previously selected technology application by selecting the corresponding control mode in C00007:  "30: CAN" for the connection to the system bus (CAN) ...
  • Page 438 0 ≡ Apply brake 1 ≡ Release brake • In conjunction with the operating mode selected in C02580 (Lenze setting: "Brake control off"). Bit 12 JogCtrlJog1 Binary coded selection of the fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints) Bit 13 JogCtrlJog2 Bit 14 SetFail 1 ≡...

  • Page 439: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    Binary coded selection of the switch-off position 1 ... 3 • Bits 5 and 6 of the control word. Bit 15 JogCtrlInputSel2 7.4.5 Setting parameters (short overview) Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00011 Appl.: Reference speed 1500 rpm C00012 Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s...
  • Page 440 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00672 L_OffsetGainP_3: Gain 1.0000 C00696 L_OffsetGainP_1: Offset 0.00 % C00697 L_OffsetGainP_2: Offset 0.00 % C00698 L_OffsetGainP_3: Offset 0.00 % C00800 L_MPot_1: Upper limit 100.00 %...

  • Page 441: Configuration Parameters

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" 7.4.6 Configuration parameters If required, the subcodes of C00760 C00761 serve to change the pre-configured assignment of the application inputs: Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_SwitchPos L_JogCtrlExtension_1 bJogCtrlInputSel1 bInputSel1 C761/9 bJogCtrlInputSel2...
  • Page 442 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Configuration parameters for "GeneralPurpose" functions Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_SwitchPos GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00830/14 nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C760/10 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a C00830/15 nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a 1209 C760/11 C00833/13 bGPAnalogSwitchSet C761/27 C00338 Out = In1 + In2 C00830/12 nGPArithmetikIn1_a...
  • Page 443 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Technology applications TA "Switch-off positioning" Configuration parameters Entry in select list LA_SwitchPos GeneralPurpose (GP) functions C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2 nGPSignalOut1_a 1212 C00410/2 C00413/3 C00413/4 nGPSignalOut2_a 1213 C00410/3 C00413/5 C00413/6 nGPSignalOut3_a 1214 C00410/4 C00413/7 C00413/8 nGPSignalOut4_a 1215 C00833/4 bGPDFlipFlop_InD...

  • Page 444: Functions

    I/O level, which are linked to the logic/arithmetic function.  Note! In the Lenze setting, the connectors for the "GeneralPurpose" functions are hidden in the function block editor. • These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the Context menu of the application block.

  • Page 445: Arithmetic

    (In1 * 1%) (±199.99%) |In2| (In1 * 100%) (100% - In2) [7-6] GeneralPurpose function "Arithmetic" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00338 L_Arithmetik_1: Function 0: nOut_a = nIn1_a  For a detailed functional description see the L_Arithmetik 7.5.3 Multiplication/Division This function multiplies an analog input signal with a parameterisable factor. The factor must be selected in the form of a quotient (numerator and denominator).

  • Page 446: Binary Delay Element

    C00833/66 bGPDigitalDelayIn bGPDigitalDelayOut C00720/1 C00720/2 [7-8] GeneralPurpose function "Binary delay element" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00720/1 L_DigitalDelay_1: On delay 0.000 s C00720/2 L_DigitalDelay_1: Off delay 0.000 s  For a detailed functional description see FB L_DigitalDelay. 7.5.5...

  • Page 447: Analog Comparison

    C00681 C00682 C00830/16 nGPCompareIn1_a bGPCompareOut C00830/17 nGPCompareIn2_a C00680 [7-10] GeneralPurpose function "Analog comparison" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00680 L_Compare_1: Fct. 6: |In1| < |In2| C00681 L_Compare_1: Hysteresis 0.50 % C00682 L_Compare_1: Window 2.00 %  For a detailed functional description see FB L_Compare.

  • Page 448: Analog Signal Monitor

    C00413/5 C00413/6 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410/4 C00413/7 C00413/8 nGPSignalOut4_a [7-12] GeneralPurpose function "Analog signal monitor" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00410/1...4 L_SignalMonitor_a: Signal 1 ... 4 0: Not connected C00413/1 L_SignalMonitor_a: Signal 1 offset 0.00 % C00413/2 L_SignalMonitor_a: Signal 1 gain 100.00 %...

  • Page 449: Numerator

    C01101 Function wGPCounter1LdVal wGPCounter1Out C01100 wGPCounter1CmpVal [7-14] GeneralPurpose function "Counter" Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01100/1 L_Counter_1: Function 0: Normal counting C01101/1 L_Counter_1: Comparison 0: Greater than or equal to  Only available with TA "Table positioning".

  • Page 450: Basic Drive Functions (Mck)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic drive functions (MCK) This chapter describes the standard and basic drive functions integrated in the Motion Control Kernel (MCK) of the 8400 HighLine which can be accessed by the active technology application via defined internal interfaces.

  • Page 451: Basic Signal Flow

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic signal flow Basic signal flow The Motion Control Kernel is connected between setpoint generator (e.g. ramp generator, PID process controller, etc.) and the motor control function in the case of the available technology applications.

  • Page 452: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Motioncontrolkernel

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" In the interconnection previously shown, the Motion Control Kernel monitors every interface. Some of the signals such as a quick stop request or a DC-injection braking request are directly passed through to the motor control.
  • Page 453 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type dnMotorRefOffset_p Home position in [increments] • Value is adopted when control bit 9 ("HomeSetPos") is set from "0" to "1" in the DINT MCK control word and is sent to the motor control function via the...
  • Page 454 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bTorqueLimitAdaptOn Adaptation of torque limitation BOOL TRUE Activate adaptation of torque limitation. nTorqueLimitAdapt_a Value for adaptation of torque limitation •...
  • Page 455 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bHomingMark Input for pre-stop mark/pre-stop signal for homing BOOL bMBrakeRelease Holding brake control: Releasing/applying the brake in connection with the selected operating mode BOOL FALSE Apply brake.

  • Page 456: Mck Status Word

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" Outputs Identifier Value/meaning Data type Control and setpoint signals for motor control The following outputs are used to transfer control signals and setpoints to the internal motor control function (LS_MotorInterface).
  • Page 457 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" Identifier Value/meaning Data type Status signal and actual-value signals from Motion Control Kernel functions nSpeedSet_v Speed setpoint selection in [increments/ms] • 16384 ≡ 15000 rpm dnPosTarget_p Target position in [increments] •...

  • Page 458: Mck Control Word

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" 8.2.1 MCK control word The motion control function implemented in the LS_MotionControlKernel system block can be controlled via the wMotionCtrl1 and wMotionCtrl2 control words. Together, both control words form a 32-bit control double word which serves to control the entire MotionControlKernel.
  • Page 459 The profile 0 is no valid profile for the "Positioning" operating mode. If a driving request with an invalid profile number is started, the response set in C00595/12 occurs (Lenze setting: "WarningLocked").  Tip! Travel requests/profiles can also be started while the drive is running. The drive does not need to be at standstill.
  • Page 460 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" 8.2.2 MCK status word MCK status word 1 (wMotionState1) Designation Description ActOpModeBit00 Active operating mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Speed follower ActOpModeBit03 Homing Manual jog...
  • Page 461 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" MCK status word 2 (wMotionState2) Designation Description 16 DwellTime "1" ≡ Dwell time after reaching the setpoint position is active. Target position monitoring (status "drive in target") 17 InTarget "1"...

  • Page 462: Mck State Machine

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" 8.2.3 MCK state machine Prio Condition Global conditions: Setpoint generation through Motor control (MCTRL): • DCB = DC-injection braking • QSP = quick stop •...

  • Page 463: Interface To Safety System

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" 8.2.4 Interface to safety system For operation with optional safety system, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block has the wSMCtrl input, This interface is used to transfer a control word by means of which the Motion Control Kernel can be supplied with information on requested or active safety functions.

  • Page 464: Mckinterface

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface MCKInterface The so-called "MCK interface" described in this chapter consists of the two function blocks L_MckCtrlInterface and L_MckStateInterface, which are connected upstream respectively downstream of the LS_MotionControlKernel system block: LS_MotionControlKernel LS_MotorInterface Motor...
  • Page 465 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface Control of the Motion Control Kernel Control of the basic drive functions implemented in the Motion Control Kernel is carried out by means of  direct specification of the control words, for example via a master control unit also connected to the fieldbus.

  • Page 466: Control Inputs | "L_Mckctrlinterface" Function Block

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface 8.3.1 Control inputs | "L_MckCtrlInterface" function block This FB provides process inputs for controlling different basic functions of the Motion Control Kernel. In addition to the ORing of discrete input signals with the control word inputs, the FB has further functions that are described in the following subchapters.
  • Page 467 • If an invalid operating mode is selected, the response set in C00595/11 BOOL activated (Lenze setting: "Warning"). • The current operating mode is displayed in C01243. bManJogPos Manual jog: bManJogNeg...
  • Page 468 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bHomingStartStop Homing: Start/stop homing • Only possible in the "referencing" operating mode. BOOL TRUE If one of referencing modes "0" ... "15" in C01221 is selected: Start reference search •...
  • Page 469 Stipulation of the profile to be executed • Optionally as a data word or binary coded. WORD • When the profile is stipulated, this FB carries out a mode change in the Lenze bProfileNo_1 setting at the same time: – If profile 0 is stipulated: Activation of "Speed follower" operating mode bProfileNo_8 –...
  • Page 470 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface Outputs Identifier Value/meaning Data type wOutMckPosCtrl_1 Output of the MCK control word 1 & 2 wOutMckPosCtrl_2 • For transfer to the LS_MotionControlKernel system block. • See the "MCK control word"...

  • Page 471: Alternative Functions For Control Bit "Posexecute

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface 8.3.1.1 Alternative functions for control bit "PosExecute" In C01297, alternative functions for bit 16 (PosExecute) in the MCK control word can be selected with bit-coding. PosStop with PosExecute = FALSE If bit 0 has been set in C01297, positioning can only be started/cancelled with the "PosExecute"...

  • Page 472: Operating Mode Change With Profile Number

    Operating mode change with profile number One of the operating modes of the LS_MotionControlKernel system block can be assigned to the positioning profiles via the four subcodes of C01298: Parameter Info Lenze setting C01298/1 Operating mode if profile 0 is selected Speed follower C01298/2...

  • Page 473: Status Outputs | Fb "L_Mckstateinterface

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface 8.3.2 Status outputs | FB "L_MckStateInterface" This FB provides the application with different status information of the Motion Control Kernel via process outputs. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 474 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) MCKInterface Inputs Identifier Information/possible settings Data type wInMckPosState_1 Inputs for accepting the status words from the LS_MotionControlKernel system block. wInMckPosState_2 WORD dnPosIn_p Position in [increments] • Is converted into [units] if C01295 = "0: dnPosIn_p"...

  • Page 475: Basic Settings

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings Basic settings 8.4.1 Machine parameters The motor end, among other things, is described by the machine parameters indicated below in respect of the mechanics used.  Note! Setting the machine parameters is a basic prerequisite for the operating modes "Homing", "Manual jog"...
  • Page 476 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings Short overview of machine parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01206/1 Mounting direction: Motor 0: Not inverted C01202/1 iM: Nominator of gearbox factor Z2 C01202/2 iM: Denominator of gearbox factor Z1...

  • Page 477: Gearbox Ratio

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings 8.4.1.1 Gearbox ratio The gearbox ratio indicates the number of rotations of the motor axis it takes for exactly one rotation of the load axis (e.g. spindle or drive roll) to take place. i = 58.667 [8-5] Schematic diagram of gearbox ratio...

  • Page 478: Feed Constant

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings 8.4.1.2 Feed constant The feed constant corresponds to the machine movement for one revolution of the gearbox output shaft.  The entry in the Feed constant (C01204) field is made in the user unit [units] in respect of the revolution.

  • Page 479: Activation Of The Modulo Measuring System

    The Modulo system is activated by setting a cycle (C01201/1) > 0 units.  The cycle can be set if the controller is enabled.  When the cycle (C01201/1) is set to 0 units (Lenze setting), the traversing range is unlimited (classical measuring system).
  • Page 480 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings Blocking zone for "absolute (Cw)" and "absolute (Ccw)"positioning modes Set a blocking zone in C01245/2 for the "absolute (Cw)" and "absolute (Ccw)" positioning modes in which no target positions are approached. This blocking zone around the current setpoint position serves to consider drift motions of the shaft in case of controller inhibit/enable cycles in order to prevent e.g.
  • Page 481 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings Case studies for Modulo positioning In the following, some case studies are shown in the various positioning modes. The target positions are defined by the user. "Absolute" positioning mode (shortest path) Case 1 Case 2 Case 3...

  • Page 482: Min/Max Speed

    Min/Max speed For the "Speed follower" operating mode, yo can initially limit the speed setpoint by means of the following parameters: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02610/2 MCK: Ramp time synchr. setpoint 2.000 s C02611/1 MCK: Pos. max. speed 199.99 %...

  • Page 483: Limit Position Monitoring

    • For the "manual jogging" operating mode, travel range monitoring is switched off by means of parameterisable software limit positions in the Lenze setting of C01230. • In the "Homing" and "Positioning" operating modes, the travel range monitoring is generally switched-on.
  • Page 484  If the software limit positions are active and a software limit position is passed ("overtravel"): – The error response "TroubleQuickStop" takes place in the Lenze setting, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill in the deceleration time set for the quick stop function and does so irrespective of the setpoint selection.

  • Page 485: Hardware Limit Switch

     If one of the two monitoring inputs is set to TRUE: – The error response "TroubleQuickStop" takes place in the Lenze setting, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill in the deceleration time set for the quick stop function and does so irrespective of the setpoint selection.
  • Page 486 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings  Note! An activated limit switch can be retracted again by manual jog in the opposed direction or with the "Retract limit switch" function. Retracting of an operated limit switch (...

  • Page 487: Target Position Monitoring (Status "Drive In Target")

    • The target position monitoring is active until the operating mode changes or a new travel command influences the setpoint. Short overview of the parameters for target position monitoring: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01244/1 MCK: Dwell time - target position 100 ms •...
  • Page 488 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Basic settings Principal procedure of the position detection C01245/1 Œ C01245/1 dnTargetPosition_p dnSetPosition_p dnActPosition_p bDone TRUE FALSE bDwellTime TRUE FALSE  bInTarget C01244/1 TRUE FALSE target position window (symmetrically around the target position; 2 x C01245/1) dwell time [8-15] Signal characteristics Status "Done"...

  • Page 489: Monitoring Of The Maximum Travel Distance

    Motion Control Kernel.  If the maximum travel distance (C01213/1) is exceeded: – The error response set in C00595/7 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "TroubleQuickStop"). – The "Ck07: Travel range limit exceeded" error message is entered into the logbook.

  • Page 490: Following Error Monitoring System

    Warning  Note! If the limit for the following error is set to "0.0000 units" (Lenze setting, the following error monitoring system is not active. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 491 "0.0000 units" and if the current following error exceeds this limit over the time set in C01244/x:  The error response set in C00595/5 C00595/6 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning").  The error message "Ck05: Error, following error 1" or "Ck06: Error, following error...

  • Page 492: Speed Follower

    In the "speed follower" operating mode, the drive follows a speed setpoint. 8.5.1 Parameter setting Short overview of parameters for the "speed follower" operating mode: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01219 MCK: Speed follower setting Bit coded C02610/2 MCK: Ramp time synchr. setpoint 2.000 s...

  • Page 493: Requesting The Operating Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Speed follower 8.5.2 Requesting the operating mode Request for "speed follower" operating mode by means of the MCK control word: MCK control word Bit 31 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OpMode_Bit3...

  • Page 494: Homing

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Homing The measuring system in the machine is selected by means of homing and the 0 position is set within the possible physical travel range: 0-Position [8-17] Homing (selection of 0 position) The zero position (home) can be defined by a reference run or by setting a home position: ...

  • Page 495: Parameter Setting

    Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing 8.6.1 Parameter setting Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer« Short overview of parameters for "Referencing" operating mode: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01221 MCK: Ref. mode 12: >_Lp C01224/1 MCK: Ref. initial speed 720.0000 unit/s C01225/1 MCK: Ref.

  • Page 496: Referencing Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing 8.6.1.1 Referencing mode Specify the referencing mode in C01221 , i.e. the way in which referencing is to take place.  For reference setting, the referencing mode "100" is to be selected in C01221. ...
  • Page 497 • Select the touch probe signal source in C01246/1. Select the edge to which the digital input used for the connection of the touch probe sensor is to respond in C02810/x. In the Lenze setting of C02810/x no touch probe is detected! •...
  • Page 498 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Abbreviations used for the referencing modes: Abbreviation Meaning > Movement in positive direction < Movement in negative direction Negative travel range limit switch Positive travel range limit switch Negative edge - pre-stop mark/pre-stop signal Touch probe or sensor reference signal/reference switch detected Mlim Torque limit value reached...
  • Page 499 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 7: <_Rn_<_TP  Touch probe  Pre-stop mark Mode 7 < < Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Search speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Active Active Active...
  • Page 500 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 8: >_TP  Touch probe Mode 8 > Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Profile speed Active Active Active Active Inactive Inactive Active Active Functional sequence: 1. Movement in positive direction with start profile data set. 2.
  • Page 501 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 10: >_Lp_<_TP  Touch probe  Positive travel range limit switch Mode 10 > < Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Search speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive...
  • Page 502 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 11: <_Ln_>_TP  Touch probe  Negative travel range limit switch Mode 11 < > Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Search speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Active Active Active...
  • Page 503 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 12: >_Lp  Positive travel range limit switch Mode 12 > Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Inactive Active Active Functional sequence: 1.
  • Page 504 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 13: <_Ln  Negative travel range limit switch Mode 13 < Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Active Active Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Functional sequence: 1.
  • Page 505 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 14: >_Mlim Mode 14 > Mlim Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Profile speed Active Active Active Active Inactive Inactive Active Active Functional sequence: 1. Movement in a positive direction with reduced torque and start profile data set. 2.
  • Page 506 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing Mode 15: <_Mlim Mode 15 < Mlim Offset path Sequence profile (optional) Start speed Profile speed Inactive Inactive Active Active Active Active Active Active Functional sequence: 1. Movement in a negative direction with reduced torque and start profile data set. 2.

  • Page 507: Home Position & Home Value Offset

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing 8.6.1.2 Home position & home value offset If the home position is set in the course of the reference search, this determined position in the machine measuring system now corresponds to the home position set in C01227/2. If a home value offset has been set in C01227/1, the drive continues correctly signed traversing by this offset at search speed after the home position has been found.

  • Page 508: Homing

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing 8.6.3 Carrying out homing Control is exercised by means of bits 8 ... 10 im MCK control word: Homing MCK control word Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 HomResetPos HomSetPos HomStartStop Stop homing...

  • Page 509: Homing On The Fly

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Homing 8.6.3.1 Homing on the fly With referencing "on the fly", the home position of a machine can be set during ongoing movement. Jerking and compensating movements do not occur. The following illustration shows the relevant interfaces for selecting the home position at the SB LS_MotionControlKernel...

  • Page 510: Manual Jog

    During manual jogging, specially assigned profile parameters are active. If they have not been set correctly, the drive can engage in uncontrolled movement!  Stop! In the Lenze setting, travel range monitoring is switched-off in C01230 by means of hardware limit switches and software limit positions for the "Manual jog"...

  • Page 511: Parameter Setting

    Basic drive functions (MCK) Manual jog 8.7.1 Parameter setting Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer« Short overview of parameters for "manual jogging" mode": Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01230 MCK: Manual jog setting Bit coded C01231/1 Manual jog: speed 1 360.0000 units/s...

  • Page 512: Functional Settings

    In C01230, various functional settings for manual jogging can be carried out in bit-coded form. Function Lenze setting Bit 0 Manual jog with intermediate stop During manual jog, a stop is automatically made at the breakpoint positions set in C01234/1...4.

  • Page 513: Smooth Start And Quick Stop Of The Drive

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Manual jog 8.7.1.2 Smooth start and quick stop of the drive  For accelerating and decelerating, Œ different values can be set in  Ž C01232/1...2 so that smooth starting and quick stopping of the drive can be implemented.

  • Page 514: Time-Based Start Of Second Speed

    FALSE FALSE C01231/1: Manual jog: Speed 1 C01231/2: Manual jog: Speed 2 C01235/1: Waiting time 2nd speed (Lenze setting: 5 s) [8-23] Time-based start of second speed  Tip! By leaving the corresponding button for manual jog pressed down for longer than...

  • Page 515: Requesting The Operating Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Manual jog 8.7.2 Requesting the operating mode Request for "manual jog" mode via the MCK control word: MCK control word Bit 31 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OpMode_Bit3 OpMode_Bit2...

  • Page 516: Manual Jog To Limit Position

    8.7.3.1 Manual jog to limit position  Stop! In the Lenze setting, travel range monitoring is switched-off in C01230 by means of hardware limit switches and software limit positions for the "Manual jog" operating mode!
  • Page 517 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Manual jog Manual jogging to hardware limit position (limit switch)  When monitoring of the limit Œ switches is switched on and a limit switch is approached during manual jog, the drive is braked within the deceleration time set for the quick stop function if the "TroubleQuickStop"...

  • Page 518: Retracting Of An Operated Limit Switch

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Manual jog 8.7.3.2 Retracting of an operated limit switch If control bit 7 (ReleaseLimitSwitch) in the MCK control word is set, retracting from an operated limit switch is possible. Traversing is carried out in the corresponding retracting direction until the limit switch is not longer operated.

  • Page 519: Positioning

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning Positioning Positioning means that a workpiece/tool or material is moved from a starting position to a defined destination Œ  To carry out positioning, a travel profile has to be stored in the drive controller for at least the following profile parameter: v [m/s] t [s]...

  • Page 520: Possible Motion Profiles

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning 8.8.1 Possible motion profiles The following illustration shows different movement profiles that can be travelled in the "positioning" mode: Asymmetrical trapezoidal profile • with S-shaped ramps Œ Asymmetrical trapezoidal profile •...

  • Page 521: Parameter Setting

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning 8.8.2 Parameter setting Short overview of parameters for "positioning" mode: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01216 MCK: Positioning setting Bit coded C01300/1...15 Profile 1 ... 15: Mode 1: absolute (beeline) C01301/1...15...

  • Page 522: Functional Settings

    "PosExecute" active Ramping down the setpoint Continuing the setpoint Positioning from the setpoint printed in bold = Lenze setting; x = any state Related topics: Stipulation of the profile to be executed ( 530) Starting/cancelling a traversing task ( 531) Firmware ≤...

  • Page 523: Profile Entry

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning 8.8.2.2 Profile entry In the »Engineer«, the following parameterisation dialog is available for setting the profile parameters: A profile is described by the following profile parameters: Symbol Profile parameter (Standard) profile Profile data set (profile numbers 1 ...
  • Page 524 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning Symbol Profile parameter Speed (C01302/1...15) Maximum speed at which the target is to be approached. • Depending on the profile parameters of position, acceleration and deceleration , it is possible that the drive will not even reach the maximum speed.
  • Page 525 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning Symbol Profile parameter Final speed (C01305/1...15) This specifies the speed at which the drive is to start the next profile after reaching the target position. With a final speed not equal to "0", "velocity changeover" or "overchange" is possible, i.e. when the target position is reached, a second positioning process is started immediately without the drive coming to a standstill at the first target position.

  • Page 526: Positioning Modes

    These modes are described in the following table.  Stop! In the positioning modes "continuous" and "relative", the "TroubleQuickStop" error response occurs in the Lenze setting when the maximum travel distance is exceeded (C01213/1). Monitoring of the maximum travel distance ( 489) ...

  • Page 527: Touch Probe Positioning

    Go to C02810/x and select the edge, the digital input used for the connection of the touch-probe sensor is to respond. In the Lenze setting of C02810/x, no touch probe is detected! Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011...

  • Page 528: Ramp Time For Jerk Limitation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning 8.8.2.5 S-ramp time for jerk limitation The maximum jerk is defined by the selection of an S-ramp time t , after which the jerk_max max. acceleration (a ) only is reached. ...
  • Page 529 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning  Note! If disproportionately high S-ramp times are set for low acceleration times, this may result in an incorrect profile generation. Example: v = 100 mm/s, a = 1000 mm/s ...

  • Page 530: Requesting The Operating Mode

    Selection of the profile number • Optionally as a data word or binary coded. WORD • In the Lenze setting, an operating mode change is carried out by the bProfileNo_1 L_MckCtrlInterface FB at the same time as the profile is stipulated: –...

  • Page 531: Starting/Cancelling A Traversing Task

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning 8.8.4.2 Starting/cancelling a traversing task Control is exercised by means of bits 16 ... 19 im MCK control word: Homing MCK control word Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16 PosStop PosFinishTarget...

  • Page 532: Override Of The Parameterised Positioning Mode

    The positioning mode set in "mode" profile parameter (C1300/1...15) is used. C. Invalid positioning mode in the MCK control word: Ck09Error message "Ck09: Invalid positioning mode". The response set in C00595/9 occurs (Lenze setting: "WarningLocked"). Designation Description PosModeBit0 Positioning mode...

  • Page 533: Position Teaching

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Positioning If the Motion Control Kernel is downstream from the MCKInterface in the circuit, the L_MckCtrlInterface FB provides the following process input for stipulating an override of the positioning mode: Identifier Information/possible settings Data type...

  • Page 534: Stop

    If the "normal stop" operating mode is active, the drive is brought to a standstill with a parameterisable deceleration ramp. 8.9.1 Parameter setting Short overview of parameters for "Normal stop" operating mode: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01251/1 Normal stop: Deceleration 720.0000 units/s2 C01252/1 Stop: S-ramp time 0.000 s...

  • Page 535: Position Follower

    In the "position follower" operating mode, the drive follows a position setpoint. 8.10.1 Parameter setting Short overview of parameters for "position follower" operating mode: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01218 MCK: Pos follower setting Bit coded C01236/1 PosFollower: Sync. speed 360.0000 units/s...

  • Page 536: Requesting The Operating Mode

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Position follower SW limit switch on If this function has been activated by means of bit 3 in C01218, travel range monitoring by means of parameterised software limit positions is active in this mode. Limit position monitoring (...

  • Page 537: Override

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Override 8.11 Override An "Override" is the change of profile parameters and their acceptance during the positioning process.  In this case the traversing profile has to be adapted accordingly, so that positioning is carried out exactly to the target position defined, even if for example a change in speed occurs during the positioning process ("Speed override"): v [m/s]...

  • Page 538: Speed Override

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Override 8.11.1 Speed override Activating override If control bit 11 (EnableSpeedOverride) has been set to "1" in the MCK control word, a speed override is carried out in accordance with the stipulated override value. If the Motion Control Kernel is downstream from the MCKInterface in the circuit, the L_MckCtrlInterface provides the following process input for activating the speed override:...

  • Page 539: Acceleration Override

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Override 8.11.2 Acceleration override Activating override If control bit 12 (EnableAccOverride) in the MCK control word has been set to "1", an acceleration override takes place in accordance with the stipulated override value. If the Motion Control Kernel is downstream from the MCKInterface in the circuit, the L_MckCtrlInterface FB provides the following process input for activating the acceleration...

  • Page 540: Ramp Smoothing Override

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Override 8.11.3 S-ramp smoothing override Activating override If control bit 13 (EnableSRampOverride) in the MCK control word is set to "1", S-ramp smoothing override is executed according to the selected override value. If the Motion Control Kernel is downstream from the MCKInterface in the circuit, the L_MckCtrlInterface FB provides the following process input for activating the S-ramp...

  • Page 541: Holding Brake Control

    Thus, proceed very carefully when commissioning this system part!  Stop! Holding brakes on Lenze motors are not intended for braking during operation. The increased wear caused by braking during operation can destroy the motor holding brake! ...

  • Page 542: Internal Interfaces

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control 8.12.1 Internal interfaces In the function block editor, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block provides the following internal interfaces for the basic function "holding brake control": Inputs Identifier Information/possible settings Data type bMBrakeRelease Releasing/applying the brake in connection with the selected operating mode...

  • Page 543: Parameter Setting

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control  Stop! The digital outputs are not suitable for the "direct" control of a holding brake! • Connect the digital output connected to the trigger signal bMBrakeReleaseOut with a relay or power contactor which switches the brake supply.
  • Page 544 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control Short overview of parameters for holding brake control: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02580 Holding brake: Operating mode 0: Brake control off C02581/1 Holding brake: Switching threshold 5.00 %...

  • Page 545: Operating Mode

     The status signal bMBrakeReleased is set to FALSE.  Note! In the Lenze setting, the mode 0 is preset to get into a safe state after the mains is switched on. Mode 11: Manual control In this mode, brake release and brake application can be directly controlled via the input bMBrakeReleaseBrake without special logic or automatic.
  • Page 546 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control  For operating modes with setpoint request via control signal (e.g. "PosExecute" in the Positioning" operating mode), the speed thresholds do not apply. Here the control logic opens and closes the holding brake through internal commands in the Motion Control Kernel.

  • Page 547: Functional Settings

    (from version 11.00.00) Revised behaviour from version 11.00.00: • "1" ≡ The ramp time of the effective acceleration of the ramp function generator (L_NSet_1) is used (Lenze setting). • "0" ≡ As before, the ramp time set in C02610/1 is used.

  • Page 548: Switching Thresholds

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control Related topics: Behaviour in case of pulse inhibit ( 556) Feedforward control of the motor before release ( 557) 8.12.2.3 Switching thresholds  Stop! Do not set the lower speed threshold for brake application too high to prevent an excessive wear of the brake! ...

  • Page 549: Application And Release Time

    C02589.  The application and release time of the Lenze holding brake is indicated in the Œ  supplied operating instructions in the "Technical data"...
  • Page 550 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control [8-29] Oscillogram 1: Current characteristic when a mechanical holding brake is closed (application time: 10.7 ms) [8-30] Oscillogram 2: Current characteristic when a mechanical holding brake is released (release time: 36.8 ms) Related topics: Process when brake is released (...

  • Page 551: Ramp Time For Approaching The Setpoint Speed

    3 % to 90 %, using the ramp time set in C02610/1 (Lenze setting: 2 s). Our example is based on the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) operating mode since the servo control (SC) operating mode does not use the switching threshold for the application of the holding brake for speed feedforward control.

  • Page 552: Motor Magnetising Time (Only With Asynchronous Motor)

    (mode 12).  Note! In the Lenze setting, the actual speed time monitoring is deactivated (C02593/1 = "0 s"), i.e. the brake will only be applied when the actual speed has reached the lower switching threshold.
  • Page 553 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control 8.12.3 Process when brake is released 1. The controller inhibit is deactivated. 2. The magnetic field required for the holding torque is created in the motor (is already available when a synchronous machine is used).
  • Page 554 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control 8.12.4 Process when brake is closed 1. The motor is decelerated when the setpoint is reduced by the user (e.g. turn down the potentiometer, setpoint selection via CAN). –...
  • Page 555 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control  Feedforward control nSpeedSetValue_a Œ  Œ nMotorSpeedAct_a nSpeedSetValue_a_ Œ Ž    ‘ bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleased CINH C02581/1: Switching threshold C02581/2: Hysteresis for release C02581/3: Hysteresis for application C02593/2: Application delay C02593/1: Actual value monitoring time C02589/1: Application time...
  • Page 556 If bit 1 is set to "0" in C02582 (Lenze setting), the brake will be immediately applied when the pulse is inhibited to avoid damage to the mechanical components. Especially in the case of hoist drives, immediate engagement of the brake is absolutely...
  • Page 557 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control 8.12.6 Feedforward control of the motor before release The motor is precontrolled by selecting the lower speed threshold for applying the brake (control modes without feedback). When the upper speed threshold for brake release is reached, the motor is precontrolled with the for the release time set in C02589 with the...
  • Page 558 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Basic drive functions (MCK) Holding brake control Selection of the feedforward control value From version 06.00.00, the feedforward control value can be selected via bit 4 in C02582:  Bit 4 = 0: Automatic selection –...

  • Page 559: Diagnostics & Error Management

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Basics on error handling in the controller Diagnostics & error management This chapter provides information on error handling, drive diagnostics, and fault analysis. Basics on error handling in the controller Many of the functions integrated into the controller can ...

  • Page 560: Led Status Displays

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management LED status displays LED status displays Information on some operating states can quickly be obtained via LED displays: CAN-RUN CAN-ERROR DRIVE READY DRIVE ERROR [9-1] LED display on the front of the controller Labelling Colour Description...

  • Page 561: Led Status Displays Of The Device Status

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management LED status displays 9.2.1 LED status displays of the device status The control of the two "DRIVE READY" and "DRIVE ERROR" LED in the lower part on the front of the controller depends on the device status. Device state machine and device statuses (...

  • Page 562: Drive Diagnostics With The "Engineer

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer« Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer« When an online connection to the controller has been established, the connected controller can be diagnosed and relevant actual controller states can be displayed in a clearly arranged visualisation using the »Engineer«: Button Function...
  • Page 563 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«  How to diagnose a drive with the »Engineer«: 1. In the Project view, select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2. Click the icon or execute the OnlineGo online command to establish an online connection to the controller.

  • Page 564: Display Details Of The Status Determining Error

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer« 9.3.1 Display details of the status determining error. If you go to the Diagnostics tab and click the button for the status determining or current error, the Error details dialog box displays further information on the error: ...

  • Page 565: Drive Diagnostics Via Keypad/Bus System

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system Keypad display of the controller status  When the keypad is connected to the diagnostic interface X6 at the front of the controller, the status of the controller is displayed via different symbols on the LCD display in the area Symbol...
  • Page 566 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system Display parameters The parameters listed in the following tables serve to query current states and actual values of the controller for diagnostic purposes, e.g. by using the keypad, a bus system or the »Engineer«...
  • Page 567 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system Parameter Display C00177/1 Switching cycles mains switching C00177/2 Switching cycles output relay C00177/3 Stress counter - short circuit C00177/4 Stress counter - earth fault C00177/5 Stress meter clamp C00178 Time the controller was enabled (elapsed-hour meter)

  • Page 568: Logbook

     ( 580)  Error messages generated by the application (via LS_SetError)  Loading/saving of parameter sets, loading of the Lenze setting (in preparation)  Transmitting the firmware to the controller (in preparation)  Switching on/off of the controller Information saved For each event, the following information is saved in the logbook: ...

  • Page 569: Functional Description

    C00169 (bit 1 ... bit 6) includes a bit coded specification of the events which are to be entered into the logbook. In the Lenze setting, all events are entered into the logbook.  Note! Events with the "No response" setting are not entered into the logbook.

  • Page 570: Reading Out Logbook Entries

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Logbook 9.5.3 Reading out logbook entries With an online connection, the existing logbook entries can easily be displayed in the »Engineer«. Alternatively, the logbook entries can also be read out via the corresponding parameters (e.g.

  • Page 571: Exporting Logbook Entries To A File

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Logbook Button Function >> more details Show more details: • Analog value 1, digital values 1 & 2 • More output types of the error numbers (32-bit, internal 32-bit and internal 16-bit).

  • Page 572: File Logbook In Project

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Logbook 9.5.5 File logbook in project If you want to display the currently available logbook entries at a later date in offline mode, i.e. without a connection to the controller, you can file the current logbook in the project. ...
  • Page 573 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Monitoring Monitoring The controller is provided with various monitoring functions which protect the drive against impermissible operating conditions.  If a monitoring function responds, – an entry will be made into the Logbook of the controller, –...

  • Page 574: Monitoring Configuration

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Monitoring 9.6.1 Monitoring configuration  How to configure the monitoring functions using the »Engineer«: 1. In the Project view, select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace. 3.

  • Page 575: Setting The Error Response

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Monitoring 9.6.2 Setting the error response When a monitoring function responds, the response set for this monitoring function (TroubleQSP, Warning, Fault, etc.) will be triggered.  For many monitoring functions the response can be individually parameterised via parameters.

  • Page 576: Autofailreset Function

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Monitoring 9.6.3 AutoFailReset function The AutoFailReset function serves to automatically reset the latching "Fault" and "TroubleQSP" errors as well as the latching "WarningLocked" warning. The "latching" term means that the effect on the controller remains active even after the error cause has been removed.

  • Page 577: Maloperation Of The Drive

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Maloperation of the drive Maloperation of the drive Maloperation Cause Remedy Motor does not DC-bus voltage is too low Check mains voltage rotate • Red LED is blinking every 1 s •...
  • Page 578 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Maloperation of the drive Maloperation Cause Remedy Motor consumes too boost has been selected too high Correct setting with C00016 much current V/f base frequency has been selected too low Correct setting with C00015 Rated motor data (stator resistance, speed, Execute automatic motor parameter...

  • Page 579: Operation Without Mains Supply

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Operation without mains supply Operation without mains supply The following display parameters have a value of "0" if the mains supply is switched off and the external 24 V supply of the controller is switched on: Parameter Info C00050...

  • Page 580: Error Messages Of The Operating System

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error messages of the operating system This chapter describes all error messages of the controller operating system and possible causes & remedies.  Tip! Each error message is also saved to the logbook in chronological order.
  • Page 581 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error type The error type gives information about the behaviour/response of the controller to the error. The error type for some device errors can also be parameterised. Bit 29 Bit 28 Bit 27...
  • Page 582 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error ID 16-bit value (0 ... 65535) for error identification within the error subject area. Example for bit coding of the error number C00168 displays an internal error number: "142278671".

  • Page 583: Structure Of The 16-Bit Error Number (Bit Coding)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system 9.9.2 Structure of the 16-bit error number (bit coding) This function extension is available from version 06.00.00! In addition to the 32-bit error number, a 16-bit error number is generated if an error occurs. It consists of the following information: ...

  • Page 584: Reset Error Message

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error subject area Assigned errors Remedy possible by user? Name Extension module slot 1 Errors that are reported by the extension module, and Yes if it is a fieldbus error. communication errors to the plugged-in extension module.

  • Page 585: Export Error Texts

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system 9.9.4 Export error texts All error texts of the controller can be exported into a text file (*.txt) for further processing.  The error text is preceded with the corresponding 32-bit and 16-bit error number (decimal).

  • Page 586: Short Overview (A-Z)

    "Cause & possible remedies". ( 589) Error number Error message Response can be set in CAN Emergency (Lenze setting) Error Code 32 bits 16 bits 16 bits xx.0125.00001 0x1901 6401 An01: AIN1_I < 4 mA...
  • Page 587 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error number Error message Response can be set in CAN Emergency (Lenze setting) Error Code 32 bits 16 bits 16 bits xx.0140.00013 0x280d 10253...
  • Page 588 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Error number Error message Response can be set in CAN Emergency (Lenze setting) Error Code 32 bits 16 bits 16 bits xx.0144.00008 0x2c08 11272 PS08: Invalid device par.

  • Page 589: Cause & Possible Remedies

    A list of all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order can be found in the previous chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" . ( 586) Su02: One mains phase is missing [xx.0111.00002] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00565 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault...
  • Page 590 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Su06: Mains input overload [xx.0111.00006] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked 5: Warning...
  • Page 591 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system ot1: Maximum torque reached [xx.0123.00001] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00608 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 592 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system oC1: Power section - short circuit [xx.0123.00016] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked...
  • Page 593 • Do not set controller inhibit during the motor data motor data identification. identification. • This cancels the identification process. The Lenze • Do not execute any device function which may setting of the motor data is used. activate controller inhibit.
  • Page 594 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system oC12: I2xt overload - brake resistor [xx.0123.00065] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked...
  • Page 595 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system FC01: Switching frequency reduction [xx.0123.00094] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00590 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 596 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system FC03: Field controller limitation [xx.0123.00099] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00570/4 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 597 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Sd3: Open circuit - feedback system [xx.0123.00205] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00586 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble...
  • Page 598 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system CE4: CAN bus off [xx.0131.00000] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00592/2 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 599 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system CA0F: CAN control word [xx.0131.00015] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00594/2 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 600 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Cl01: Module missing/incompatible [xx.0140.00013] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C01501/2 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked...
  • Page 601 IDs. binding IDs. • Consult the machine manufacturer. Note: Lenze cannot modify e.g. a replacement device via special access to make it work with a personalised memory module. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011...
  • Page 602 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system dF14: SW-HW invalid [xx.0145.00014] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked 5: Warning 6: Information...
  • Page 603 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system dF10: AutoTrip reset [xx.0145.00035] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00189 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked...
  • Page 604 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Ck02: Neg. HW limit switch [xx.0184.00002] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00595/2 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 605 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Ck16: Time overflow manual operation [xx.0184.00064] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked 5: Warning...
  • Page 606 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system Ck10: Implausible profile data [xx.0184.08007] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00595/10 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...
  • Page 607 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system dH68: Adjustment data error CU [xx.0400.00104] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop 4: WarningLocked 5: Warning...
  • Page 608 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management Error messages of the operating system US05: User error 5 [xx.0984.00001] Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C00581/5 Adjustable response) 0: No Reaction 1: Fault 2: Trouble 3: TroubleQuickStop...

  • Page 609: System Block "Ls_Seterror_1

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management System block "LS_SetError_1" 9.10 System block "LS_SetError_1" This system block is used for error handling within the application.  The application can trip up to four different user error messages with parameterisable error IDs and error responses via the four boolean inputs.
  • Page 610 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management System block "LS_SetError_1" Parameter Parameter Possible settings Info C00161/1...4 65535 Error ID for user errors 1 ... 4 C00581/1...4 Response to user errors 1 ... 4 0 No Reaction 1 Fault (pulse inhibit) 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked...

  • Page 611: System Block "Ls_Seterror_2

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management System block "LS_SetError_2" 9.11 System block "LS_SetError_2" This system block is used for error handling within the application.  The application can trip up to four different user error messages with parameterisable error IDs and error responses via the four boolean inputs.
  • Page 612 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Diagnostics & error management System block "LS_SetError_2" Parameter Parameter Possible settings Info C00161/5...8 65535 Error ID for user errors 5 ... 8 C00581/5...8 Response to user errors 5 ... 8 0 No Reaction 1 Fault (pulse inhibit) 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked...

  • Page 613: System Bus "Can On Board

    CANopen system bus interface classified in different subcategories. • Information on CAN communication modules and CANopen system bus interfaces of other Lenze devices is provided in the "CAN" communication manual in the Lenze library. Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011...

  • Page 614: General Information

    For many years, the system bus (CAN) based on the CANopen communication profile has been integrated in Lenze controllers. Due to the lower number of data objects available, the functionality and compatibility of the previous system bus are lower as compared to CANopen.

  • Page 615: General Data And Application Conditions

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" General information 10.1.1 General data and application conditions Range Values Communication profile CANopen, DS301 V4.02 Communication medium DIN ISO 11898 Network topology Line terminated at both ends Adjustable node addresses Depending on the number of SDO channels set in C00366: (max.

  • Page 616: Communication Time

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" General information 10.1.3 Communication time The communication time is the time between the start of a request and the arrival of the corresponding response.  Tip! The communication times in the CAN network depend on: •...

  • Page 617: Possible Settings Via Dip Switch

    Switch: "a" ... "d"  Node address Switch: "1" ... "64" [10-1] DIP switch Lenze setting: All DIP switches are in the "OFF" position  Note! • The DIP switch settings are accepted if a node address is unequal zero when the device or the 24-V supply is switched on by the DIP address.

  • Page 618: Setting The Baud Rate

    The baud rate can be set via code C00351 or with the DIP switches a to d:  Note! • All DIP switches (a ... d, 1 ... 64) = OFF (Lenze setting): – At switching on, the settings under code C00350 (node address) and C00351 (baud rate) will become active.

  • Page 619: Led Status Displays For The System Bus

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" LED status displays for the system bus 10.3 LED status displays for the system bus  CAN-RUN: CAN-RUN Signals the CANopen state CAN-ERROR  CAN-ERROR: Signals a CANopen error Frequency of the display CAN signalling and meaning Permanently red...

  • Page 620: Going Online Via System Bus (Can On Board)

    The integrated system bus interface (CAN on board, X1 terminal) can also be used for the communication between the »Engineer« and the controller, alternatively to the USB diagnostic adapter.  Lenze offers the following communication accessories for connection to the PC: Communication accessories PC interface...

  • Page 621: Structure Of The Can Data Telegram

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Structure of the CAN data telegram 10.6 Structure of the CAN data telegram [10-2] Basic structure of the CAN telegram The following subchapters provide a detailed description of the identifier and the user data.
  • Page 622  The basic identifiers for network management (NMT) and sync as well as the basic SDO channel (SDO1) are defined in the CANopen protocol and cannot be changed.  In the Lenze setting, the basic identifiers of the PDOs are preset according to the "Predefined connection set" of DS301, V4.02 and can be changed via parameters/indexes if required.

  • Page 623: User Data

    Parameter data (SDOs – service data objects)  Parameter data are the CANopen indexes or, in case of Lenze devices, the codes.  Parameters are, for instance, used for one-off plant setting during commissioning or when the material is changed on a production machine.

  • Page 624: Communication Phases/Network Management

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Communication phases/network management 10.7 Communication phases/network management Regarding communication via the system bus, the controller distinguishes between the following statuses: Status Explanation "Initialisation" After switch-on, an initialisation run is carried out. (Initialisation) •...

  • Page 625: Status Transitions

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Communication phases/network management 10.7.1 Status transitions [10-3] NMT status transitions in the CAN network Transition NMT command Status after Effects on process/parameter data after status change change Initialisation Initialisation starts automatically when the mains is switched on.

  • Page 626: Network Management Telegram (Nmt)

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Communication phases/network management 10.7.2 Network management telegram (NMT) The telegram for the network management contains identifier "0" and the command included in the user data which consists of the command byte and the node address: [10-4] Network management telegram for changing over the communication phases Command specifier (cs) NMT command...

  • Page 627: Parameterising The Controller As Can Master

     A delay time can be set in C00356/1 which must expire after mains switching before the controller transmits the "Start remote node" NMT telegram. Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00352 CAN Slave/Master Slave C00356/1 CAN delay boot-up - Operational 3000 ms ...

  • Page 628: Process Data Transfer

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Process data transfer 10.8 Process data transfer [10-5] PDO data transfer from / to the higher-level host system "BaseLine C" versions have two separate process channels (PDO1 and PDO2) and from the "StateLine"...

  • Page 629: Available Process Data Objects

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Process data transfer 10.8.1 Available process data objects Controllers of the 8400 series have a maximum number of 3 receive PDOs (RPDOs) and 3 transmit PDOs (TPDOs). Process data object Version from version "BaseLine C"...

  • Page 630: Rpdo1 | Port Block "Lp_Canin1

    The LP_CanIn1 port block maps process data object RPDO1 in the FB Editor. dnIn12_p output is available from version 11.00.00! Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanIn1: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/1 LP_CanIn1: Inversion bCtrl1_B0..15 0x0000 C00866/1 LP_CanIn1: wCtrl C00866/2...

  • Page 631: Rpdo2 | Port Block "Lp_Canin2

    The LP_CanIn2 port block maps process data object RPDO2 in the FB Editor. dnIn12_p output is available from version 11.00.00! Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanIn2: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/3 LP_CanIn2: Inversion bIn1_B0..15 0x0000 C00866/5 LP_CanIn2: wIn1 C00866/6...

  • Page 632: Rpdo3 | Port Block "Lp_Canin3

    The LP_CanIn3 port block maps process data object RPDO3 in the FB Editor. dnIn12_p output is available from version 11.00.00! Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanIn3: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/5 LP_CanIn3: Inversion bIn1_B0..15 0x0000 C00866/9 LP_CanIn3: wIn1 C00866/10...

  • Page 633: Tpdo1 | Port Block "Lp_Canout1

    Process data transfer 10.8.1.4 TPDO1 | Port block "LP_CanOut1" The LP_CanOut1 port block maps process data object TPDO1 in the FB Editor. Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut1: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/2 LP_CanOut1: Inversion bState_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/1 LP_CanOut1:wState C00868/2...

  • Page 634: Tpdo2 | Port Block "Lp_Canout2

    Process data transfer 10.8.1.5 TPDO2 | Port block "LP_CanOut2" The LP_CanOut2 port block maps process data object TPDO2 in the FB Editor. Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut2: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/4 LP_CanOut2: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/5 LP_CanOut2: wOut1 C00868/6...

  • Page 635: Tpdo3 | Port Block "Lp_Canout3

    Process data transfer 10.8.1.6 TPDO3 | Port block "LP_CanOut3" The LP_CanOut3 port block maps process data object TPDO3 in the FB Editor. Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut3: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00401/6 LP_CanOut3: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/9 LP_CanOut3: wOut1 C00868/10...

  • Page 636: Identifiers Of The Process Data Objects

    10.8.2 Identifiers of the process data objects In the Lenze setting, the identifier for process data objects PDO1 ... PDO3 consists of a so- called basic identifier (CANBaseID) and the node address set in C00350: Identifier (COB-ID) = basic identifier + node address (node ID) ...

  • Page 637: Transmission Type

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Process data transfer 10.8.3 Transmission type Process data objects can be transmitted in an event-controlled or time-controlled manner. The below table shows that it is possible to combine the different methods by means of logic operations (AND, OR): ...
  • Page 638 The communication parameters such as the transmission mode and cycle time can be set freely for every PDO and independently of the settings of other PDOs: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit CAN1_OUT C00322/1 Transmission mode...
  • Page 639 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Process data transfer Blocking time C00324/x a "blocking time" can be set which defines the shortest transmission cycle with the transmission type"asynchronous - manufacturer-specific/device profile-specific". Example: Cycle time = 500 ms, blocking time = 100 ms, data change sporadically: ...

  • Page 640: Pdo Synchronisation Via Sync Telegram

    1 ... 240. If the Rx mode is 254 or 255, the data are accepted in the next device cycle, irrespective of the sync telegram. Short overview: Parameters for the synchronisation via sync telegram Parameter Info Lenze setting Assignment Value Unit Sync Sync...

  • Page 641: Monitoring Of The Rpdos For Data Reception

    If the RPDO is not received within the monitoring time or with the configured sync, the response parameterised for the respective RPDO is activated. Short overview: Parameters for RPDO monitoring Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00357/1...3 CAN1...3_IN monitoring time 3000 ms C00593/1...3...
  • Page 642 System bus "CAN on board" Process data transfer Finally, the following parameters define the value that the process data words are to have when they are decoupled: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00343/1 LP_CanIn1:wCtrl DiscVal C00343/2...4 LP_CanIn1:wIn2...wIn4 DiscVal C00343/5...8 LP_CanIn2:wIn1...wIn4 DiscVal...

  • Page 643: Parameter Data Transfer

    Parameter data transfer [10-8] Parameter data transfer via the available parameter data channels Parameters are values stored in codes on Lenze controllers. Two parameter data channels are available for parameter setting, enabling the simultaneous connection of different devices for configuration purposes.

  • Page 644: Identifiers Of The Parameter Data

    Parameter data transfer 10.9.1 Identifiers of the parameter data objects In the Lenze setting, the basic identifiers of the SDOs are preset according to the "Predefined Connection Set". The identifiers of the parameter data objects SDO1 and SDO2 result from the basic...
  • Page 645 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer 10.9.2.1 Command 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 LOW byte HIGH...

  • Page 646: Addressing By Means Of Index And Subindex

    HIGH word byte LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte A parameter (a Lenze code) is addressed as per the following formula: Index = 24575 - (Lenze code number) Example C00011 parameter (motor reference speed) is to be addressed. Calculation: ...

  • Page 647: Data 1 ... Data

    The "Factor" column of the Table of attributes contains a so-called scaling factor for all Lenze parameters. The scaling factor is relevant to the transfer of parameter values which have one or more decimal positions in the parameter list. If the scaling factor is > 1, the value must be multiplied by the indicated scaling factor prior to transmission to be able to transfer the value as an integer.

  • Page 648: Error Messages

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer 10.9.2.4 Error messages 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Error code 0x80 LOW byte HIGH byte LOW word HIGH word...
  • Page 649 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer Meaning of the error codes The error codes are standardised acc. to DS301, V4.02. Error code Explanation 0x0503 0000 Toggle bit not changed 0x0504 0000 SDO protocol expired 0x0504 0001 Invalid or unknown client/server command specifier 0x0504 0002...

  • Page 650: Parameter Data Telegram

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer 10.9.3 Parameter data telegram examples 10.9.3.1 Read parameters Task: The heatsink temperature of 43 °C (code C00061, data format INTEGER16, scaling factor 1) of the controller with node address "5" is to be read. Telegram to drive Identifier User data...

  • Page 651: Write Parameters

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer 10.9.3.2 Write parameters Task: The rated current of the connected motor is to be entered with I = 10.20 A (code C00088) into the controller with node address "2". Data 1 ...

  • Page 652: Read Block Parameters

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer 10.9.3.3 Read block parameters Task: The firmware version (code C00099) is to be read from the parameter set of the controller with node address "12". The firmware version has a length of 11 ASCII characters which are transmitted as a block parameter.
  • Page 653 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer Telegram 2 to the drive: Request of the 1st data block Identifier User data 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte Command...
  • Page 654 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Parameter data transfer Telegram 3 to the drive: Request of the 2nd data block Identifier User data 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte Command...

  • Page 655: Monitoring

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Monitoring 10.10 Monitoring 10.10.1 Integrated error detection If a node detects an error, it rejects the CAN telegram bits received so far and transmits an error flag. The error flag consists of 6 consecutive bits with the same logic value. The following errors are detected: Bit error The sending node follows the transmission on the bus and interrupts the transmission if it...
  • Page 656 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Monitoring  Tip! The errors mentioned before indicate that a physical error has occurred in the bus system. Possible causes are: • Several nodes with identical node address • Wrong baud rate of one or several nodes •...

  • Page 657: Heartbeat Protocol

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Monitoring 10.10.2 Heartbeat protocol The heartbeat protocol can be used for node monitoring purposes within a CAN network. Basic workflow r: Reserved (always 0) s: Status of the producer (0: Boot-up, 4: Stopped, 5: Operational, 127: Pre-Operational) [10-9] Heartbeat protocol 1.

  • Page 658: Telegram Structure

    Boot-up Stopped Operational Pre-Operational 10.10.2.2 Parameter setting Short overview of the parameters for the "Heartbeat" monitoring function: Parameter Info Lenze setting Assignment Value Unit Consumer Producer C00347/1...n CAN status of the heartbeat producer 1 ... n C00381 Heartbeat producer time 0 ms C00385/1...n...
  • Page 659  The NMT master receives an emergency telegram containing emergency error code 0x8130.  The response parameterised in C00592/5 is activated (Lenze setting: "No response").  Note! The heartbeat monitoring will not start until the first heartbeat telegram of a monitored producer has been received successfully and the "Pre-Operational"...

  • Page 660: Commissioning Example

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Monitoring 10.10.2.3 Commissioning example Task An 8400 controller (node 2) which is configured as heartbeat consumer is to monitor another 8400 controller (heartbeat producer, node 1).  The heartbeat producer is to transmit a heartbeat telegram to the heartbeat consumer every 10 ms.

  • Page 661: Emergency Telegram

    LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte See table below • For emergency error code 0xF000: Lenze error number (value displayed in C00168) • All other emergency error codes have a value of "0" here. Emergency error codes Error register...

  • Page 662: Implemented Canopen Objects

    CANopen objects for parameter setting. The CANopen objects described in this chapter are defined in the CAN specification DS301 V4.02. Many CANopen objects can be mapped on Lenze codes. In the following table, the corresponding Lenze codes are listed in the column "Relationship to Lenze codes".
  • Page 663 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects CANopen object Relationship to Lenze code Index Subindex Name I-1400 RPDO1 communication parameter Highest subindex supported COB-ID used by RPDO C00355/1 Transmission type C00323/1 I-1401 RPDO2 communication parameter...
  • Page 664 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects CANopen object Relationship to Lenze code Index Subindex Name I-1A00 TPDO1 mapping parameter Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 ... 4 Application object 1 ... 4 C00868/1...4...
  • Page 665 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1000 Index Name: I-1000 Device type Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Device type 4294967295 ro The CANopen index I-1000 specifies the profile for this device.
  • Page 666 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1003 Index: Name: I-1003 Predefined error field Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Number of errors 255 rw 1 ...
  • Page 667 I-1006. Writing identifiers To receive PDOs, the value 0x80 must be entered in the 11-bit identifier in the Lenze setting (and according to CANopen specification) . This means that all modules are by default set to the same sync telegram.
  • Page 668 Setting the sync telegram cycle time.  The cycle time can be selected as "1000" or as an integer multiple of it.  If "0 μs" is set (Lenze setting), no sync telegrams are created.  This object relates to code C00369.
  • Page 669 Subindex Meaning Lenze code Number of nodes to be monitored 1 ... n Node ID and heartbeat time of the node to be monitored Node ID:...
  • Page 670 3: Revision number 4: Serial number Subindex Meaning Manufacturer's identification number • The identification number allocated to Lenze by the organisation "CAN in Automation e. V." is "0x0000003B". Product code 0x84001 8400 BaseLine C 0x84002 8400 StateLine C 0x84003 8400 HighLine C...
  • Page 671 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1200 Index: Name: I-1200 SDO1 server parameter Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Highest subindex supported 2 ro 1: COB-ID client ->...
  • Page 672  The SDO server parameter is only valid, if bit 31 is set to "0" for both transmission directions (subindex 1 and 2).  In the Lenze setting, the SDO server channels 2 are deactivated (bit 31 = "1").  The identifier can only be changed if the SDO is invalid (bit 31 = "1").
  • Page 673 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects Example Parameter data channel 2 of the controller with node address 4 shall be activated.  For this, bit 31 must be set to "0" (≡ "SDO is valid") in subindices 1 and 2 of the object 1201.
  • Page 674 (11 ... 28)* *) The extended identifier (29 bits) is not supported. Any of these bits must be "0". RTR to this PDO possible (cannot be set) RTR to this PDO not possible (Lenze) PDO active PDO not active [10-12] I-1400 ... I-1402, subindex 1 Firmware ≤...
  • Page 675 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects Description of subindex 2 PDO transmission Transmission type Explanation cyclic synchronous event-controlled n = 1 ... 240 When a value n is entered, this PDO will be accepted with every nth SYNC. n = 254 PDO will be accepted immediately.
  • Page 676 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1402 Index: Name: I-1402 RPDO3 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Highest subindex supported - (read access only) 1: COB-ID used by RPDO 0x400 + node ID...
  • Page 677 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1600 Index: Name: I-1600 RPDO1 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Number of mapped application 8 rw objects in PDO 1 ...
  • Page 678 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1602 Index: Name: I-1602 RPDO3 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Number of mapped application 8 rw objects in PDO 1 ...
  • Page 679 * The extended identifier is not supported. Bit 11 ... bit 29 must be set to "0". [10-15] Data telegram assignment Setting Bit 30 0 RTR to this PDO possible (Lenze). 1 RTR to this PDO not possible (not adjustable) Bit 31 0 PDO active...
  • Page 680 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects Subindex 2 - transmission type PDO transmission Transmission type Explanation cyclic synchronous event- controlled n = 1 ... 240 When a value n is entered, this PDO will be accepted with every nth SYNC.
  • Page 681 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1801 Index: Name: I-1801 TPDO2 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Highest subindex supported - (read access only) 1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x280 + node ID...
  • Page 682 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1802 Index: Name: I-1802 TPDO3 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Highest subindex supported - (read access only) 1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x380 + node ID...
  • Page 683 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1A00 Index: Name: I-1A00 TPDO1 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Number of mapped application 8 rw objects in PDO 1 ...
  • Page 684 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Implemented CANopen objects I-1A02 Index: Name: I-1A02 TPDO3 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type 0: Number of mapped application 8 rw objects in PDO 1 ...
  • Page 685 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual System bus "CAN on board" Internal interfaces | System block "LS_CANManagement" 10.12 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_CANManagement" This function extension is only available from version 04.00.00! The LS_CANManagement system block serves to control internal functions of the CAN driver (reset node and re-initialisation) and to display the "Operational"...

  • Page 686: Fieldbus Interface

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Fieldbus interface Fieldbus interface The drive controllers of the 8400 series can accommodate plug-in communication modules and can therefore take part in the data transfer of an existing fieldbus system. When using a communication module, the major advantage for the user is the possibility of parameterising, controlling, and diagnosing the drive system via the available fieldbus.

  • Page 687: Process Data Transfer

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Fieldbus interface Process data transfer 11.1 Process data transfer The process data serve to control the controller. Thus the transfer of the process data is time-critical.  The process cycle is 1 ms, irrespective of the respectively plugged-in bus system and the type of drive controller.
  • Page 688 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Fieldbus interface Process data transfer Voltage supply Depending on the complexity and functional range of the fieldbus, the communication modules are supplied by the standard device or an external 24 supply at the module. The external 24 V voltage supply of the communication module is required if the supply of the standard device fails but the communication via the bus is to continue.

  • Page 689: Control Mode "Mci

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Fieldbus interface Control mode "MCI" 11.2 Control mode "MCI" "40: MCI" can be selected as a control mode in C00007 in order to quickly and easily set-up drive controller control by means of MCI-PDOs via the fieldbus interface. Given that the technology applications are fundamentally different and have different requirements regarding the signals sent to them, predefined assignment of the MCI-PDOs depends on the technology application selected in C00005:...

  • Page 690: Port Block "Lp_Mciin

    The LP_MciIn port block maps the received MCI-PDOs in the FB Editor. Outputs dnIn56_p and dnIn78_p are available from version 11.00.00! Short overview of the parameters for LP_MciIn: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00876/1 LP_MciIn:wCtrl C00876/2...16 LP_MciIn: wIn2 ... wIn16 C00890/1 LP_MciIn: Inversion bCtrl_B0..15...

  • Page 691: Port Block "Lp_Mciout

    11.2.2 Port block "LP_MciOut" The LP_MciOut port block maps the MCI-PDOs to be transmitted in the FB Editor. Short overview of the parameters for LP_MciOut: Parameter Info Lenze setting C00877/1 LP_MciOut:wState C00877/2...16 LP_MciOut: wOut2 ... wOut16 C00890/2 LP_MciOut: Inversion bState_B0..15...

  • Page 692: Synchronisation Of The Internal Time Base

    – MCI  sync signal of a plugged-in communication module (EtherCAT, PROFINET or Powerlink) Short overview of the parameters for the synchronisation of the internal time base: Parameter Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00370/1 CAN Sync instant of transmission - μs...

  • Page 693: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Syncmanagement

     The recommended reset time for the CAN bus as synchronisation source in case of occurring deviations is 300 ns (Lenze setting).  If synchronisation is not reached, select a higher correction width.  The optimum setting depends on quartz precision and must be determined empirically if required.

  • Page 694: Parameter Change-Over

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Internal interfaces | System block "LS_WriteParamList" Parameter change-over This function extension is only available from version 04.00.00! For up to 32 freely selectable parameters, this basic function provides a change-over between four sets with different parameter values. The parameter list is created in the same way as the user menu is composed, namely by means of parameterisation.
  • Page 695 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Internal interfaces | System block "LS_WriteParamList" Outputs Identifier Value/meaning Data type bDone "Writing of the parameter list completed" status signal • The output is automatically reset to FALSE if writing via bExecute is activated BOOL again.

  • Page 696: Configuring The List Using The "Engineer" Parameterisation Dialog

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Configuring the list using the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog 13.2 Configuring the list using the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog  Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the parameter change- over: 1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine controller. 2.
  • Page 697 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Configuring the list using the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog Creating/changing the list  To create or change the list, proceed as follows: 1. Click on Change list button. • The dialog box entitled Configure WriteParamList is shown: •...
  • Page 698 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Configuring the list using the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog 3. Click on the button in order to add the highlighted parameters to the WriteParamList on the right-hand side. • With the buttons, you can alter the sequence of parameters in the WriteParamList.

  • Page 699: Configuring The List By Means Of Parameterisation

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Configuring the list by means of parameterisation Importing/exporting the list For cross-device reuse of the configured WriteParamList, you can click on the Export list and Import list buttons to save the parameter selection as an *.epc file and then to re-import the saved *.epc file into another drive controller 8400.

  • Page 700: Selecting A Value Set

    Activating the writing of the parameters For writing the parameter list, two modes are available in C01082:  0: by Execute (Lenze setting) The writing of the parameter list is activated by a FALSE/TRUE edge at the bExecute control input.
  • Page 701 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter change-over Activating the writing of the parameters After successful completion ... the bDone output is set to TRUE.  The bDone output is automatically reset to FALSE if writing via bExecute is activated again.

  • Page 702: Parameter Reference

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter reference This chapter describes all parameters which can be used for parameterising and monitoring the controller. Parameters which are only available in the controller from a certain software version onwards are marked with a corresponding note in the parameter description ("from version xx.xx.xx").

  • Page 703: Structure Of The Parameter Descriptions

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Structure of the parameter descriptions 14.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions Each parameter is described in the Parameter list in the form of a table which consists of the following three areas: Table header The table header contains the following general information: ...

  • Page 704: Data Type

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Structure of the parameter descriptions 14.1.1 Data type The parameters can be of the following data types: Data type Meaning INTEGER_16 16-bit value with sign INTEGER_32 32-bit value with sign UNSIGNED_8 8-bit value without sign UNSIGNED_16 16-bit value without sign UNSIGNED_32...

  • Page 705: Parameters With Write Access

    Only parameters with a check mark ( ) in front of the "write access" attribute can be changed by the user. The Lenze setting for these parameters is printed in bold.  The settings can either be selected from a selection list or the values can be entered directly.

  • Page 706: Parameters With Bit-Coded Setting

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Structure of the parameter descriptions Parameter setting in the »Engineer« In the »Engineer«, a list field is used for parameter setting: 14.1.3.3 Parameters with bit-coded setting Description structure Parameter | Name: Data type: _______ Index: _______ Cxxxxx | _____________ Description...

  • Page 707: Parameters With Subcodes

    Parameters with subcodes Description structure Parameter | Name: Data type: _______ Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______ Description Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Cxxxxx/1 Cxxxxx/2 Cxxxxx/3 Cxxxxx/4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer Scaling factor: 1 Parameter setting in the »Engineer«...
  • Page 708 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Structure of the parameter descriptions Scaling factor The "scaling factor" is important for parameter access via a bus system. Signal type Scaling factor Resolution Value range Analog (scaled) 16 bits signed ± 199.99 % Angular velocity 16 bits signed ±...

  • Page 709: Parameter List

    Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00002/1 0: Off / ready Load Lenze setting • All parameters are reset to the Lenze setting. • Only possible when the controller is inhibited. C00002/2 0: Off / ready Reserved C00002/3 0: Off / ready...
  • Page 710 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00002 | Device command Index: 24573 = 5FFD C00002/14 0: Off / ready Reserved C00002/15 0: Off / ready Reserved C00002/16 1: On / start Enable controller "1"...
  • Page 711 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00003 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00002 | Device command Index: 24573 = 5FFD C00002/31 0: Off / ready Set password • From version 06.00.00 Password protection C00002/32 0: Off / ready Check password •...
  • Page 712 = 5FFA Selection of the technology application Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Wiring has changed This display appears if the FB interconnection has been changed in the application level using the FB Editor. 1000 Actuating drive speed This technology application is used to solve speed- controlled drive tasks, e.g.
  • Page 713 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00006 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00006 | Motor control Index: 24569 = 5FF9 8 VFCplus: V/f quadr This control type is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor via a square-law V/f characteristic.
  • Page 714 TA "Table positioning" – "Switch-off positioning" TA Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Wiring has changed This is displayed when the FB interconnection has been changed in the I/O level via the FB Editor. 10 Terminals 0 The technology application is controlled via the digital and analog input terminals of the controller.
  • Page 715 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00008 TA "Table positioning" Input/output 10: Terminals 0 12: Terminals 2 14: Terminals 11 16: Terminals 16 Controller enable / Reset of error message Positive limit switch Negative limit switch Positive limit switch Manual jog in positive direction...
  • Page 716 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00008 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00008 | Original application|control source Index: 24567 = 5FF7 16 Free|Terminal 16 Application: Interconnection has been changed. I/O level: "Terminal 16" control mode 20 Free|Keypad Application: Interconnection has been changed.
  • Page 717 From version 04.00.00 Analog terminals: Signal adaptation via characteristic Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00010/1 0.00 % AIN1: (+y0) = min C00010/2 0.00 % AIN1: (+x0) = Dead band C00010/3 0.00 %...
  • Page 718 L_NSet_1 FB: Acceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint • Generally, this ramp generator is used for all speed-controlled technology applications. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.999 2.000 s...
  • Page 719 • When a variable switching frequency is selected, the switching frequency may change as a function of the load and rotational frequency. Selection of switching frequency Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised 2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised 3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised...
  • Page 720 From version 04.00.00 Analog terminals: Signal adaptation via characteristic Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00020/1 0.00 % AIN2: (+y0) = min C00020/2 0.00 % AIN2: (+x0) = Dead band C00020/3 0.00 %...
  • Page 721 • If the value falls below this threshold, the bNactCompare output sets the LS_DriveInterface system block to TRUE. • Switching hysteresis = +1 % Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 0.00 % Read access Write access...
  • Page 722 Input signal is the current signal 4 mA ... 20 mA • 4 mA ... 20 mA ≡ 0 % ... +100 % • The current loop is monitored for open circuit (I < 4 mA) by the device. Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00034/1 0: -10V..+10V AIN1: Config.
  • Page 723 = 5FD8 L_NSet_1 FB: Fixed speed setpoints (JOG values) for the setpoint generator Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00039/1 40.00 % Fixed setpoint 1 C00039/2 60.00 % Fixed setpoint 2 C00039/3 80.00 %...
  • Page 724 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00052 C00052 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00052 | Motor voltage Index: 24523 = 5FCB Display of the current motor voltage/output voltage of the inverter Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000 Read access Write access...
  • Page 725 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00057 C00057 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_32 C00057 | Maximum torque Index: 24518 = 5FC6 Display of the maximum torque to be generated by the motor • The maximum torque to be generated by the motor depends on various factors, e.g. on Imax in motor mode (C00022) and the motor type used.
  • Page 726 C00070 | Vp speed controller Amplification factor Vp of the speed controller for different motor control modes Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 600.00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00070/1 15.00 SLVC: Vp speed controller C00070/2 6.00...
  • Page 727 Index: 24504 = 5FB8 Reset time Ti of the speed controller for different motor control modes Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 6000.0 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00071/1 100.0 ms SLVC: Ti speed controller C00071/2 50.0 ms...
  • Page 728 • After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 500.00 7.00 V/A...
  • Page 729 Configuration of different options for servo control (SC) and sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) Selection list 0 Off 1 On Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00079/1 0: Off SC: Current controller - feedforward control • Feedforward control/decoupling network of the current controller.
  • Page 730 After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) mOhm...
  • Page 731 Note: It is mandatory to give the rated motor frequency for the sensorless vector control (SLVC) and the servo control (SC). Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000 50 Hz Read access...
  • Page 732 • The additional acceleration times set here can be selected via the binary inputs bTI1 ... bTI8 of the L_NSet_1 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.999 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00101/1 0.000 s Add. accel. time 1 ... 15 C00101/... C00101/15...
  • Page 733 • The additional deceleration times set here can be selected via the binary inputs bTI1 ... bTI8 of the L_NSet_1 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.999 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00103/1 0.000 s Add. decel. time 1 ... 15 C00103/... C00103/15...
  • Page 734 Hold time of the automatic DC injection brake • The DC injection brake is applied for the time set here if the value falls below the speed setpoint set in C00019. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.000 0.500 s...
  • Page 735 DI1/6 = 1-track frequency input DI2/7 = specification of direction 4 DI1(6)=CountIn / DI2(7)=In DI1/6 = counter input DI2/7 = digital input Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00115/1 0: DI1(6)=In / DI2(7)=In Function assignment of DI1 and DI2 C00115/2 0: DI1(6)=In / DI2(7)=In...
  • Page 736 Operating threshold for the "OC6: Motor overload (I²xt)" error message • The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00606. • The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 250.00 100.00 %...
  • Page 737 = 5F79 L_NSet_1 FB: Configuration of the ramp rounding for the main setpoint Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off Ramp rounding deactivated 1 PT1 behaviour Ramp rounding with PT1 behaviour • The corresponding S-ramp time must be set in C00182.
  • Page 738 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00137 C00137 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00137 | Device status Index: 24438 = 5F76 Display of the current device status Selection list (read only) 0 FirmwareUpdate 1 Init 2 MotorIdent 3 ReadyToSwitchON 4 SwitchedON...
  • Page 739 Index: 24433 = 5F71 C00142 | Auto-start option Starting performance of the controller after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as a reset of "Trouble" or "Fault" can be parameterised individually. Automatic restart after mains connection/fault...
  • Page 740 Index: 24431 = 5F6F Activation of the automatic switching frequency reduction if the temperature is too high Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off Automatic switching frequency reduction deactivated 1 On Automatic switching frequency reduction activated Read access...
  • Page 741 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00150 C00150 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00150 | Status word Index: 24425 = 5F69 Bit coded device status word Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded:...
  • Page 742 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00155 C00155 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00155 | Extended status word Index: 24420 = 5F64 Bit coded device status word 2 Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded:...
  • Page 743 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00158 C00158 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00158 | Cause of controller inhibit Index: 24417 = 5F61 Bit coded display of the cause/source of the controller inhibit Display area (min.
  • Page 744 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00159 C00159 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00159 | Cause of quick stop QSP Index: 24416 = 5F60 Bit coded display of the cause/source of the quick stop Display area (min.
  • Page 745 C00161 | LS_SetError_x: Error number Index: 24414 = 5F5E Setting of the error number for user error messages Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00161/1 LS_SetError_1: Error no.1 C00161/2 LS_SetError_1: Error no.2 C00161/3 LS_SetError_1: Error no.3 C00161/4 LS_SetError_1: Error no.4...
  • Page 746 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00163 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00163 | Logbook - binary elements Index: 24412 = 5F5C 26 CAN2 input bit 3 27 CAN2 input bit 4 28 CAN2 input bit 5 29 CAN2 input bit 6 30 CAN2 input bit 7 31 CAN2 input bit 8...
  • Page 747 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00163 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00163 | Logbook - binary elements Index: 24412 = 5F5C 70 MCI word1 input bit15 71 MCI word2 input bit0 72 MCI word2 input bit1 73 MCI Word 2 Input bit 2 74 MCI word2 input bit3 75 MCI word2 input bit4...
  • Page 748 Parameter list | C00164 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00163 | Logbook - binary elements Index: 24412 = 5F5C Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00163/1 0: No signal Logbook - binary element 1 C00163/2 0: No signal Logbook - binary element 2...
  • Page 749 48 L_PCTRL_1: Out 49 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out1 50 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out2 51 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out3 52 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out4 53 L_MulDiv_1: Out 54 L_NSet_1: Target setpoint Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00164/1 0: No signal Logbook - analog element 1 Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 750 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00166 C00166 Parameter | Name: Data type: VISIBLE_STRING C00166 | Error information text Index: 24409 = 5F59 Display of details on the status determining error and on the currently pending error Subcodes Info C00166/1...
  • Page 751 The set mains voltage influences the brake chopper threshold, the monitoring of the device utilisation (Ixt) and the switch-off threshold in case of undervoltage in the DC bus. Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 3ph 400V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 400 V or 1-phase 230 V 1 3ph 440V / 1ph 230V...
  • Page 752 Selection of the braking procedure Select response if the brake resistor is controlled Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 R_Brems The brake resistor is used. When the threshold voltage (C00174) is exceeded, the brake resistor is energised.
  • Page 753 From version 06.00.00 Time for device search function (optical location) Device search function Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 6000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00181/1 Time - device search function Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 754 = 5F43 Setting which error messages are to be reset automatically. AutoFailReset function Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off No automatic error message reset 1 Fault + TroubleQSP Error messages with the response "Fault" and "TroubleQSP" are reset automatically 2 WarningLocked Error messages with the response "WarningLocked"...
  • Page 755 C00189 | Resp. to too frequent AutoFailReset Index: 24386 = 5F42 Response to exceeding the maximum number of "AutoFailReset" processes set in C00186. AutoFailReset function Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked...
  • Page 756 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00201 C00201 Parameter | Name: Data type: VISIBLE_STRING C00201 | Firmware Index: 24374 = 5F36 Display of the firmware data of the control card and the power section Subcodes Info C00201/1 Firmware type - ctrl card...
  • Page 757 Index: 24355 = 5F23 C00220 | L_NSet_1: Acceleration time - add. setpoint L_NSet_1 FB: Acceleration time for the additional setpoint nNAdd_a Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.999 0.000 s Read access Write access...
  • Page 758 Data type: INTEGER_16 C00225 | L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit Index: 24350 = 5F1E L_PCTRL_1 FB: Maximum output value of the PID process controller Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 199.99 % Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 759 Index: 24342 = 5F16 L_PCTRL_1 FB: Use of the root function at the actual value input Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off Root function inactive • The actual value nAct_a remains unchanged for further processing 1 On Root function active •...
  • Page 760 • Depending on the selection, the blue switches in the displayed signal flow are set accordingly in the Engineer on the Application parameters tab for the L_PCTRL_1 Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off The input setpoint nNSet_a is output without any changes at the output nOut_a. 1 nNSet + nNSet_PID nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values.
  • Page 761 C00247 | L_PCTRL_1: Window setpoint reached Index: 24328 = 5F08 From version 06.00.00 FB L_PCTRL_1: Window for comparison operation "actual value = setpoint" Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 100.00 2.00 % Read access Write access...
  • Page 762 Note: The most significant bit determines the sign of the value, the remaining bits determine the numerical value. Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 15 bits Bit 0 ... bit 14 are evaluated 2 14 bits Bit 0 ... bit 13 are evaluated 3 13 bits Bit 0 ...
  • Page 763 C00272 | SC: Depth of current setpoint filter Index: 24303 = 5EEF Damping of the current setpoint filter at servo control (SC) and sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM) Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 100 0 db Read access Write access...
  • Page 764 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00290 C00290 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00290 | RCOM error counter Index: 24285 = 5EDD This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! C00291 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8...
  • Page 765 = 5EC7 C00312 | System runtimes From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 μs 1638.375 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00312/1 0.000 μs System runtime reserve Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer...
  • Page 766 = 5EBE Display of the current and the maximum runtime of the main program in the controller Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00321/1 0 ms Curr. runtime of main program C00321/2 0 ms Max.
  • Page 767 C00338 | L_Arithmetik_1: Function L_Arithmetik_1 FB: Selection of internal arithmetics Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Out = In1 1 Out = In1 + In2 2 nOut_a = nIn1_a - nIn2_a 3 Out = (In1 * In2) / 100%...
  • Page 768 From version 04.00.00 Selection of the events for which the bFail error output of the LS_CANMAnagement SB must be set to TRUE. Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0) Value is bit-coded: (...
  • Page 769 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Trouble Bit 15 Fault Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00342/1 CAN decoupling PDO_In from the bus C00342/2 CAN decoupling PDO_Out from the appl. Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer Firmware ≤...
  • Page 770 Definition of the value the process data words are to have in the decoupled state. Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00343/1 LP_CanIn1:wCtrl DiscVal C00343/2 LP_CanIn1:wIn2 DiscVal...
  • Page 771 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00345 C00345 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00345 | CAN error status Index: 24230 = 5EA6 System bus "CAN on board" Selection list (read only) 0 No Error 1 Warning ErrActive 2 Warning ErrPassive 3 Bus off...
  • Page 772 • The node address can only be parameterised if the node address "0" is set via the DIP switches. • A change in the node address will not be effective until a CAN Reset Node is performed. System bus "CAN on board" Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 127 1 Read access...
  • Page 773 • The baud rate can only be parameterised if the baud rate "0" is set via the DIP switches. • A change in the baud rate will not be effective until a CAN Reset Node is performed. System bus "CAN on board" Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 500 kbps 1 250 kbps 2 125 kbps...
  • Page 774 Bit 0 COBID Bit0 • Bit 0 ... 10: COB-ID • Bit 11 ... 30: Reserved ..• Bit 31: PDO invalid (is not transmitted) Bit 31 PDO invalid Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00354/1 COBID CAN1_IN C00354/2 COBID CAN1_OUT C00354/3...
  • Page 775 Different time settings for the CAN interface System bus "CAN on board" Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00356/1 3000 ms CAN delay boot-up - operat. • Delay time for NMT state change from "Boot-up" to "Operational".
  • Page 776 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00359 C00359 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00359 | CAN status Index: 24216 = 5E98 System bus "CAN on board" Selection list (read only) 0 Operational 1 Pre-Operat. 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 BootUp...
  • Page 777 05.00.00, parameter data channels 1 and 2 are activated in the Lenze setting. • From version 05.01.00, only parameter data channel 1 is activated according to CANopen in the Lenze setting. To activate both parameter data channels according to the previous behaviour, select "2 SDO Lenze". System bus "CAN on board"...
  • Page 778 Identifier by means of which the sync slave is to receive sync telegrams. • Mapping of the CANopen object I-1005 (see DS301 V4.02). System bus "CAN on board" Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0080 (decimal: 128) Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set)
  • Page 779 = 5E8E C00369 | CAN sync transmission cycle time Cycle during which the sync master is to transmit sync telegrams. • If "0 ms" is set (Lenze setting), no sync telegrams are generated. • Mapping of the CANopen object I-1006 (see DS301 V4.02).
  • Page 780 • The heartbeat telegram is sent automatically as soon as a time > 0 ms is set. • Mapping of the CANopen object I-1017 (see DS301 V4.02). Heartbeat protocol Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 0 ms Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 781 = 5E6F Time setting of the pulse to be output by the SB LS_PulseGenerator Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00400/1 1000 ms Length of LOW level (break) C00400/2 1000 ms Length of HIGH level...
  • Page 782 Index: 24166 = 5E66 From version 02.00.00 Mapping for port blocks LP_CanIn1...3 CAN port block Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00409/1 LP_CanIn1:wCtrl MapVal C00409/2 LP_CanIn1:wIn2 MapVal C00409/3 LP_CanIn1:wIn3 MapVal C00409/4 LP_CanIn1:wIn4 MapVal...
  • Page 783 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00412 | L_SignalMonitor_b: Inversion Index: 24163 = 5E63 L_SignalMonitor_b FB: Inversion of the binary outputs Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x00 0xFF 0x00 (decimal: 0) Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info...
  • Page 784 = 5E58 Delay times for the digital output terminals Digital output terminals Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 65.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00423/1 0.000 s Relay ON delay C00423/2 0.000 s Relay OFF delay C00423/3 0.000 s...
  • Page 785 C00434 | OxU/I: Gain Index: 24141 = 5E4D Gain of the analog outputs Analog terminals Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00434/1 100.00 % O1U: Gain C00434/2 100.00 % O2U: Gain C00434/3 100.00 %...
  • Page 786 C00440 | LS_AnalogIn1: PT1 time constant PT1 time constant (S-ramp time) for the analog inputs Analog terminals Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00440/1 10 ms PT1 rounding AnalogIn1 C00440/2 10 ms...
  • Page 787 From version 04.00.00 Configuration defining the events that lead to a decoupling of the analog output terminals. Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0)
  • Page 788 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00443 C00443 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00443 | DIx: Level Index: 24132 = 5E44 Bit coded display of the level of the digital inputs Digital input terminals Display area (min.
  • Page 789 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00444 C00444 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00444 | DOx: Level Index: 24131 = 5E43 Bit coded display of the level of the digital outputs Digital output terminals Display area (min.
  • Page 790 From version 04.00.00 Configuration defining the events that lead to a decoupling of the digital output terminals. Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0)
  • Page 791 Definition of the value the digital output terminals are to have in the decoupled state. • Bit set = HIGH level Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0)
  • Page 792 = 5E32 C00461 | Remote: Acceleration/deceleration time From version 06.00.00 PC manual control Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.999 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00461/1 2.000 s Remote: Acceleration/deceleration time Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 793 ProfileNo_Bit3 Bit 28 ProfileNo_Bit4 Bit 29 ProfileNo_Bit5 Bit 30 ProfileNo_Bit6 Bit 31 ProfileNo_Bit7 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00463/1 Remote: MCK control Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...
  • Page 794 = 5E2E C00465 | Keypad: Timeout welcome screen Time setting for the automatic change of the keypad display to the welcome screen Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Never display welcome screen 5 5 min 15 15 min...
  • Page 795 = 5E2A Selection of the function for the STOP key on the keypad Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No function STOP key does not have any function 1 Inhibit controller STOP key sets controller inhibit in the drive...
  • Page 796 = 5E27 LS_ParFree_a SB: Setting of the analog signals to be output Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00472/1 0.00 % Value for output nPar1_a C00472/2 0.00 % Value for output nPar2_a C00472/3 100.00 %...
  • Page 797 LS_ParFreeUnit / LS_ParFreeUnit_2: Setting of the position signals to be output Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 units 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00475/1 0.0000 units Values for output dnC475_1 ... dnC475_32 C00475/... C00475/32 Read access...
  • Page 798 Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded: Bit 0 Bit0 ..Bit 15 Bit15 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00477/1 Value for output wC477_1 ... wC477_32 C00477/... C00477/32 Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 799 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00480 C00480 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00480 | LS_DisFree_b Index: 24095 = 5E1F LS_DisFree_b SB: Display of the input values Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded:...
  • Page 800 SB: Offset for display of the input variables in application unit Display of internal process factors in application units Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00484/1 0.00 % Application unit 1: Offset C00484/2 0.00 %...
  • Page 801 Selection of the feedback system for the generation of the actual position on the load Encoder/feedback system Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No sensor No encoder available on the load 1 Sensor signal FreqIn12 Position encoder signal is fed via digital inputs DI1 and...
  • Page 802 Selection of the feedback system for the actual speed for motor control and display Encoder/feedback system Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No sensor No sensor available for the actual speed detection 1 Sensor signal FreqIn12 Speed sensor signal is fed via the digital DI1 and DI2...
  • Page 803 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00507 C00507 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00507 | Current password protection Index: 24068 = 5E04 From version 06.00.00 Display of the currently active device access protection Device access protection Display area (min.
  • Page 804 • Format: <code number>,<subcode number> • If "0.000" is set, no entry will be displayed in the user menu. Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 16000.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00517/1 51.000 C00051: Display of actual speed value C00517/2 53.000...
  • Page 805 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00565 | Resp. to mains phase failure Index: 24010 = 5DCA Response to the failure of mains phases Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 806 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00567 | Resp. to speed controller limited Index: 24008 = 5DC8 Response if speed controller output is limited (bLimSpeedCtrlOut = TRUE) Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access...
  • Page 807 Index: 24001 = 5DC1 Response which is triggered if the threshold set in C00572 for monitoring brake resistor utilisation is reached. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 808 C00582 | Resp. to heatsink temp. > shutdown temp. -5°C Index: 23993 = 5DB9 Response if the heatsink temperature has reached the switch-off temperature threshold. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access...
  • Page 809 Index: 23990 = 5DB6 Response to motor overtemperature • The motor temperature is measured by means of a PTC thermistor at terminal X106. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access...
  • Page 810 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00592/1 0: No Reaction Response to incorrect telegram for CAN communication C00592/2 0: No Reaction Response to "BusOff" (bus system switched off)
  • Page 811 Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 5 Warning Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00594/1 1: Fault Response if error bit 14 in the CAN control word is set. C00594/2 1: Fault Response if error bit 14 in the MCI control word is set.
  • Page 812 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00595/1 3: TroubleQuickStop Response if the input bLimitSwitchPos for travel range monitoring is set to FALSE (fail-safe) by the positive hardware limit switch .
  • Page 813 • If a phase current does not exceed the threshold set in C00599 for more than one period, the response set here will be triggered. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access...
  • Page 814 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 Index: 23973 = 5DA5 C00602 | Resp. to earth fault Response to earth fault in the motor phase(s) Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 815 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00608 | Resp. to maximum torque Index: 23967 = 5D9F Response if the maximum torque (C00057) is reached. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 816 • The selection list contains all 16 bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16 bit inputs displayed by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - analog signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00620/1 1003: LA_nCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a (V)
  • Page 817 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00620 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00620 | System connection list: 16-bit Index: 23955 = 5D93 C00620/39 0: Not connected LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a (I) C00620/40 0: Not connected LS_AnalogOutput: nOut2_a (I) C00620/41 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_a: nDis5_a...
  • Page 818 • Selection of the binary output signals to be connected to the binary input signals • The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00621/1 1001: LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail LS_DigitalOutput: bRelay C00621/2...
  • Page 819 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00621 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00621 | System connection list: Bool Index: 23954 = 5D92 C00621/13 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: bState_B8 C00621/14 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: bState_B9 C00621/15 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: bState_B10...
  • Page 820 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00621 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00621 | System connection list: Bool Index: 23954 = 5D92 C00621/57 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B12 C00621/58 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B13 C00621/59 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B14...
  • Page 821 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00621 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00621 | System connection list: Bool Index: 23954 = 5D92 C00621/101 0: Not connected LS_DigitalOutput: bOut HighCurrent C00621/102 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_b: bDis9 C00621/103 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_b: bDis10...
  • Page 822 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00621 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00621 | System connection list: Bool Index: 23954 = 5D92 C00621/145 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/146 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/147 0: Not connected LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn3 C00621/148 0: Not connected...
  • Page 823 • Selection of the 32-bit output signals for connection with the 32-bit input signals. • The selection list contains all 32-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 32-bit inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - angle signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00622/1 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_p: dnDis1_p C00622/2...
  • Page 824 C00631 | L_LimitPhi 1-3: Min/Max Index: 23944 = 5D88 Setting the limits Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 Incr. 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00631/1 -2147483647 incr. L_LimitPhi_1: Min.Limit C00631/2 2147483647 incr. L_LimitPhi_1: Max.Limit C00631/3 -2147483647 incr.
  • Page 825 Data type: INTEGER_16 Index: 23940 = 5D84 C00635 | L_NSet_1: nMaxLimit L_NSet_1 FB: Maximum speed setpoint for speed setpoint limitation Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 199.99 % Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 826 Pole position identification without motion Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00643/1 1: Fault Response to PLI monitoring Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer Scaling factor: 1 Firmware ≤...
  • Page 827 2 nOut_a = nIn1_a - nIn2_a 3 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * nIn2_a) / 100% 4 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 1%) / |nIn2_a| 5 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 100%) / (100% - nIn2_a) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00650/1 0: nOut_a = nIn1_a L_Arithmetik_3: Function C00650/2...
  • Page 828 Index: 23913 = 5D69 From version 04.00.00 FB L_FixSet_w_2: Setting of the fixed values Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00662/1 Fixed value 0 ... 15 C00662/... C00662/16 Read access Write access...
  • Page 829 Index: 23901 = 5D5D Angular gain as multiplier of the input signal + angular offset Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00674/1 L_OffsetGainPhiP_1: Gain C00674/2 L_OffsetGainPhiP_2: Gain Read access Write access...
  • Page 830 FB: Comparison operation • If the statement of the selected comparison operation is true, the binary bOut output will be set to TRUE. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 In1 = In2 2 In1 > In2 3 In1 < In2 4 |In1| = |In2| 5 |In1| >...
  • Page 831 FB: Comparison operation • If the statement of the selected comparison operation is true, the binary bOut output will be set to TRUE. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 In1 = In2 2 In1 > In2 3 In1 < In2 4 |In1| = |In2| 5 |In1| >...
  • Page 832 1 In1 = In2 2 In1 > In2 3 In1 < In2 4 |In1| = |In2| 5 |In1| > |In2| 6 |In1| < |In2| Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00693/1 1: In1 = In2 L_Compare_4: Function C00693/2 1: In1 = In2...
  • Page 833 Data type: INTEGER_16 C00697 | L_OffsetGainP_2: Offset Index: 23878 = 5D46 L_OffsetGainP_2 FB: Offset (additive to the input signal) Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 0.00 % Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 834 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00700 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00700 | LA_NCtrl: Analog connection list Index: 23875 = 5D43 C00700/9 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a (input for analog-value selector analog signal 1) C00700/10 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a...
  • Page 835 • The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00701/1 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bCInh (control input for setting controller inhibit)
  • Page 836 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00701 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00701 | LA_NCtrl: Digital connection list Index: 23874 = 5D42 C00701/21 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bGPFree1 C00701/22 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bGPFree2 C00701/23 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bGPAnalogSwitchSet...
  • Page 837 • The selection list contains all 16 bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16 bit inputs displayed by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - analog signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00710/1 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: wCanDriveControl...
  • Page 838 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00710 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00710 | LA_TabPos: Analog connection list Index: 23865 = 5D39 C00710/11 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: wPosProfileNo (input for MCK positioning profile number in positioning mode) C00710/12 0: Not connected...
  • Page 839 • The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00711/1 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bCInh (control input for setting controller inhibit)
  • Page 840 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00711 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00711 | LA_TabPos: Digital connection list Index: 23864 = 5D38 C00711/21 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bHomeSetPosition (control input for setting the home position) C00711/22 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bHomeResetPosition...
  • Page 841 • The selection list contains all 32-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 32-bit inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - angle signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00712/1 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: dnPosProfilePosition (input for selecting the target position in [increments])
  • Page 842 Index: 23855 = 5D2F C00720 | L_DigitalDelay_1: Delay Switch-on/off delay time Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 3600.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00720/1 0.000 s L_DigitalDelay_1: ON delay C00720/2 0.000 s L_DigitalDelay_1: OFF delay Read access...
  • Page 843 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00725 C00725 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00725 | Current switching frequency Index: 23850 = 5D2A Display of the current switching frequency • In C00018 you can choose between a drive-optimised setting for good smooth-running characteristics and an inverter loss-optimised setting (min.
  • Page 844 C00727 | LS_Keypad digital values Index: 23848 = 5D28 Execution of control commands for keypad operation Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00727/1 "1" ≡ request quick stop C00727/2 "1" ≡ request DC-injection braking C00727/3 "1"...
  • Page 845 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00734 C00734 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00734 | Oscilloscope trigger channel selection Index: 23841 = 5D21 This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! C00735 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8...
  • Page 846 • The selection list contains all 16 bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16 bit inputs displayed by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - analog signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00760/1 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: wCANDriveControl...
  • Page 847 • The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00761/1 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bCInh (control input for setting controller inhibit)
  • Page 848 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00761 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00761 | LA_SwitchPos: Digital connection list Index: 23814 = 5D06 C00761/10 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel2 (selection input 2 for binary coded selection of the switch-off position 1 ...
  • Page 849 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00762 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00761 | LA_SwitchPos: Digital connection list Index: 23814 = 5D06 C00761/33 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bGPDFlipFlop_InClk (control input for DFlipFlop clock signal) C00761/34 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bGPDFlipFlop_InClr...
  • Page 850 C00804 | L_MPot_1: Inactive fct. L_MPot_1 FB: Selection of the response if the motor potentiometer is deactivated via input bInAct Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Retain value Keep output value 1 Deceleration to 0 Deceleration via ramp to 0...
  • Page 851 C00805 | L_MPot_1: Init fct. Index: 23770 = 5CDA L_MPot_1 FB: Selection of the response at device switch-on Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Load last value 1 Load lower limit 2 Load 0 Read access Write access...
  • Page 852 = 5CD6 FB L_NLim_2: Maximum skip frequencies Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00809/1 0.00 % Maximum blocking frequency for zone 1 C00809/2 0.00 % Maximum blocking frequency for zone 2 C00809/3 0.00 %...
  • Page 853 C00820 | L_DigitalLogic_1: Function L_DigitalLogic_1 FB: Selection of the internal logic function Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 bOut = 0 Constant value "FALSE" 1 bOut = 1 Constant value "TRUE" 2 bOut = bIn1 AND bIn2 AND bIn3...
  • Page 854 Index: 23753 = 5CC9 L_DigitalLogic_2 FB: Selection of the internal logic function Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 bOut = 0 Constant value "FALSE" 1 bOut = 1 Constant value "TRUE" 2 bOut = bIn1 AND ... bIn3 AND operation 3 bOut = bIn1 OR ...
  • Page 855 Index: 23751 = 5CC7 FB L_DigitalLogic5_1: Selection of the interna logic operation Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 bOut = 0 1 bOut = 1 2 bOut = f (truth table) The truth table parameterised in C00825 is used.
  • Page 856 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00825 | L_DigitalLogic5_1: Truth table Index: 23750 = 5CC6 Selection list 0 False 1 TRUE Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00825/1 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1: bIn5...bIn1=0 0 0 0 0 C00825/2 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1: bIn5...bIn1=0 0 0 0 1...
  • Page 857 Index: 23749 = 5CC5 FB L_DigitalLogic5_2: Selection of the interna logic operation Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 bOut = 0 1 bOut = 1 2 bOut = f (truth table) The truth table parameterised in C00827 is used.
  • Page 858 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00827 | L_DigitalLogic5_2: Truth table Index: 23748 = 5CC4 Selection list 0 False 1 TRUE Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00827/1 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2: bIn5...bIn1=0 0 0 0 0 C00827/2 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2: bIn5...bIn1=0 0 0 0 1...
  • Page 859 From version 11.00.00 L_DigitalLogic_3 FB: Selection of the internal logic function Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 bOut = 0 Constant value "FALSE" 1 bOut = 1 Constant value "TRUE" 2 bOut = bIn1 AND bIn2 AND bIn3...
  • Page 860 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00830 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00830 | 16-bit inputs [%] Index: 23745 = 5CC1 C00830/12 L_Arithmetik_1: nIn1_a C00830/13 L_Arithmetik_1: nIn2_a C00830/14 L_AnalogSwitch_1: nIn1_a C00830/15 L_AnalogSwitch_1: nIn2_a C00830/16 L_Compare_1: nIn1_a C00830/17 L_Compare_1: nIn2_a...
  • Page 861 C00830/77 MCK: nSpeedAdd_v C00830/78 MCK: wAuxCtrl C00830/79 MCK: wSMCtrl C00830/80 L_OffsetGainP_3: nIn_a C00830/81 L_MPot_1: nIn_a C00830/82 L_MulDiv_1: nIn_a C00830/83 LS_DataAccess: wIn1 (Lenze-internal) C00830/84 LS_DataAccess: wIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00830/85 LS_DataAccess: wIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00830/86 LS_DataAccess: wIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00830/87 L_PT1_1: nIn_a C00830/88 MCTRL: nSpeedHighLimit_a...
  • Page 862 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00831 C00831 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00831 | 16-bit inputs Index: 23744 = 5CC0 Decimal/hexadecimal/bit coded display of 16 bit input values of various blocks Display area (min.
  • Page 863 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00831 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00831 | 16-bit inputs Index: 23744 = 5CC0 C00831/37 DCTRL: wCANControl C00831/38 DCTRL: wMCIControl C00831/39 L_NLim_1: nIn_a C00831/40 Reserved C00831/41 L_Compare_2: nIn1_a C00831/42 L_Compare_2: nIn2_a C00831/43...
  • Page 864 Parameter list | C00832 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00831 | 16-bit inputs Index: 23744 = 5CC0 C00831/81 L_MPot_1: nIn_a C00831/82 L_MulDiv_1: nIn_a C00831/83 LS_DataAccess: wIn1 (Lenze-internal) C00831/84 LS_DataAccess: wIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00831/85 LS_DataAccess: wIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00831/86 LS_DataAccess: wIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00831/87 L_PT1_1: nIn_a...
  • Page 865 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00832 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00832 | 16-bit inputs [rpm] Index: 23743 = 5CBF C00832/19 Reserved C00832/20 MCTRL: nPosCtrlPAdapt_a C00832/21 MCTRL: nPosCtrlOutLimit_a C00832/22 MCTRL: nSpeedSetValue_a C00832/23 MCTRL: nSpeedLowLimit_a C00832/24 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlI_a C00832/25...
  • Page 866 C00832/77 MCK: nSpeedAdd_v C00832/78 MCK: wAuxCtrl C00832/79 MCK: wSMCtrl C00832/80 L_OffsetGainP_3: nIn_a C00832/81 L_MPot_1: nIn_a C00832/82 L_MulDiv_1: nIn_a C00832/83 LS_DataAccess: wIn1 (Lenze-internal) C00832/84 LS_DataAccess: wIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00832/85 LS_DataAccess: wIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00832/86 LS_DataAccess: wIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00832/87 L_PT1_1: nIn_a C00832/88 MCTRL: nSpeedHighLimit_a...
  • Page 867 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00833 C00833 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00833 | Binary inputs Index: 23742 = 5CBE Display of the signal status of the binary inputs of different blocks Selection list 0 False 1 TRUE Subcodes...
  • Page 868 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00833 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00833 | Binary inputs Index: 23742 = 5CBE C00833/40 DCTRL: bStatus_B3 C00833/41 DCTRL: bStatus_B4 C00833/42 DCTRL: bStatus_B5 C00833/43 DCTRL: bStatus_B14 C00833/44 DCTRL: bStatus_B15 C00833/45 DCTRL: bFree_1 C00833/46...
  • Page 869 C00833/96 L_Transient_4: bIn C00833/97 Reserved C00833/98 MCTRL: bTorqueLimitAdaptOn C00833/99 L_NSet_1: bNAddInv C00833/100 L_MPot_1: bEnable C00833/101 L_NLim_1: bEnable C00833/102 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn1 (Lenze-internal) C00833/103 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00833/104 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00833/105 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00833/106 L_PCTRL_1: bEnableInfluenceRamp C00833/107 LS_SetError_2: bSetError1 C00833/108...
  • Page 870 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00834 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00833 | Binary inputs Index: 23742 = 5CBE C00833/125 L_Or_4: bIn2 C00833/126 L_Or_4: bIn3 C00833/127 L_DigitalLogic_3: bIn1 C00833/128 L_DigitalLogic_3: bIn2 C00833/129 L_DigitalLogic_3: bIn3 Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 871 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00835 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00835 | 16-bit inputs [%] (Set2) Index: 23740 = 5CBC C00835/16 L_Counter_2: wLdVal C00835/17 L_Counter_2: wCmpVal C00835/18 L_Counter_3: wLdVal C00835/19 L_Counter_3: wCmpVal C00835/20 L_PhaseIntK_1: nIn_v C00835/21...
  • Page 872 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00835 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00835 | 16-bit inputs [%] (Set2) Index: 23740 = 5CBC C00835/60 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2: wInLWord C00835/61 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2: wInHWord C00835/62 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3: wInLWord C00835/63 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3: wInHWord C00835/64 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1: wInLWord C00835/65...
  • Page 873 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00835 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00835 | 16-bit inputs [%] (Set2) Index: 23740 = 5CBC C00835/104 L_ProcessCtrl_1: nInfluence_a C00835/105 L_PhiIntegrator_1: nIn_v C00835/106 L_PhiIntegrator_1: wGearNum C00835/107 L_PhiIntegrator_1: wGearDenom C00835/108 L_SwitchPoint_1: nActSpeed_v C00835/109...
  • Page 874 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00836 C00836 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00836 | 16-bit inputs (Set2) Index: 23739 = 5CBB Decimal/hexadecimal/bit coded display of 16 bit input values of various blocks Display area (min.
  • Page 875 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00836 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00836 | 16-bit inputs (Set2) Index: 23739 = 5CBB C00836/37 L_Counter_1: wLdVal C00836/38 L_Counter_1: wCmpVal C00836/39 L_GainOffsetP_1: nIn_a C00836/40 L_GainOffsetP_2: nIn_a C00836/41 L_GainOffsetP_3: nIn_a C00836/42 L_Limit_1: nIn_a...
  • Page 876 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00836 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00836 | 16-bit inputs (Set2) Index: 23739 = 5CBB C00836/81 L_SRFG_1: nSet_a C00836/82 L_SRFG_2: nSet_a C00836/83 L_SignalSwitch_1: wIn1 C00836/84 L_SignalSwitch_2: wIn1 C00836/85 L_SignalSwitch_3: wIn1 C00836/86 L_SignalSwitch_4: wIn1...
  • Page 877 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00837 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00836 | 16-bit inputs (Set2) Index: 23739 = 5CBB C00836/125 L_ConvX_1: nNum C00836/126 L_ConvX_1: wDenom C00836/127 L_ConvX_2: nIn_a C00836/128 L_ConvX_2: nNum C00836/129 L_ConvX_2: wDenom C00836/130 L_ConvX_3: nIn_a...
  • Page 878 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00837 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00837 | 16-bit inputs [rpm] (Set2) Index: 23738 = 5CBA C00837/21 L_Negation_2: nIn_a C00837/22 L_NLim_2: nIn_a C00837/23 L_OffsetGain_3: nIn_a C00837/24 L_OffsetGain_3: nOffset_a C00837/25 L_OffsetGain_3: nGain_a C00837/26...
  • Page 879 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00837 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00837 | 16-bit inputs [rpm] (Set2) Index: 23738 = 5CBA C00837/65 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1: wInHWord C00837/66 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2: wInLWord C00837/67 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2: wInHWord C00837/68 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3: wInLWord C00837/69 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3: wInHWord C00837/70...
  • Page 880 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00838 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00837 | 16-bit inputs [rpm] (Set2) Index: 23738 = 5CBA C00837/109 L_PhiIntegrator_1: nSpeedAdd_v C00837/110 L_DFSET_1: nSpeedTrim_v C00837/111 L_DFSET_1: nSpeedTrim_a C00837/112 L_DFSET_1: wGearNum C00837/113 L_DFSET_1: wGainNum C00837/114...
  • Page 881 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00838 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 C00838/3 L_And5_1: bIn3 C00838/4 L_And5_1: bIn4 C00838/5 L_And5_1: bIn5 C00838/6 L_And5_2: bIn1 C00838/7 L_And5_2: bIn2 C00838/8 L_And5_2: bIn3...
  • Page 882 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00838 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 C00838/47 L_Not_7: bIn C00838/48 L_RSFlipFlop_1: bSet C00838/49 L_RSFlipFlop_1: bReset C00838/50 L_RSFlipFlop_2: bSet C00838/51 L_RSFlipFlop_2: bReset C00838/52 L_SampleHold_1: bLoad...
  • Page 883 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00838 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 C00838/91 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit8 C00838/92 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit9 C00838/93 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit10 C00838/94 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit11 C00838/95 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit12 C00838/96 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit13...
  • Page 884 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00838 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 C00838/135 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bOperationMode_1 C00838/136 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bOperationMode_2 C00838/137 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bOperationMode_4 C00838/138 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bOperationMode_8 C00838/139 L_PhaseDiff_1: bEnable C00838/140 L_PhaseDiff_2: bEnable...
  • Page 885 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00839 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 C00838/179 L_PosCtrlLin_2: bExecute C00838/180 L_PosCtrlLin_2: bSetPos0 C00838/181 L_PosCtrlLin_2: bPosMode C00838/182 L_PosCtrlLin_2: bEnable C00838/183 L_SwitchPoint_1: bDisable C00838/184 L_DFSET_1: bZeroPulse...
  • Page 886 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00839 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_32 C00839 | 32-bit inputs [incr] (Set2) Index: 23736 = 5CB8 C00839/13 L_ArithmetikPhi_2: dnIn1_p C00839/14 L_ArithmetikPhi_2: dnIn2_p C00839/15 L_ArithmetikPhi_3: dnIn1_p C00839/16 L_ArithmetikPhi_3: dnIn2_p C00839/17 L_GainOffsetPhiP_1: dnIn_p C00839/18...
  • Page 887 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00840 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_32 C00839 | 32-bit inputs [incr] (Set2) Index: 23736 = 5CB8 C00839/57 L_SwitchPoint_1: dn2ndPoint_Size3_p C00839/58 L_SwitchPoint_1: dnSwitchPoint4_p C00839/59 L_SwitchPoint_1: dn2ndPoint_Size4_p C00839/60 L_DFSET_1: dnSetTPPos_p C00839/61 L_DFSET_1: dnActTPPos_p C00839/62...
  • Page 888 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00840 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00840 | 16-bit inputs I/O level [%] Index: 23735 = 5CB7 C00840/17 LS_DisFree_a: nDis4_a C00840/18 LS_DisFree: wDis1 C00840/19 LS_DisFree: wDis2 C00840/20 LS_DisFree: wDis3 C00840/21 LS_DisFree: wDis4 C00840/22...
  • Page 889 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00841 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16 C00840 | 16-bit inputs I/O level [%] Index: 23735 = 5CB7 C00840/61 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wParIndex C00840/62 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wParSubindex C00840/63 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wInHWord C00840/64 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wInLWord C00840/65 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wParIndex C00840/66...
  • Page 890 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00841 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00841 | 16-bit inputs I/O level Index: 23734 = 5CB6 C00841/20 LS_DisFree: wDis3 C00841/21 LS_DisFree: wDis4 C00841/22 LP_MciOut: wState C00841/23 LP_MciOut: wOut2 C00841/24 LP_MciOut: wOut3 C00841/25...
  • Page 891 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00843 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00841 | 16-bit inputs I/O level Index: 23734 = 5CB6 C00841/64 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wInLWord C00841/65 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wParIndex C00841/66 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wParSubindex C00841/67 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wInHWord C00841/68 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wInLWord C00841/69...
  • Page 892 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00843 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00843 | Binary inputs I/O level Index: 23732 = 5CB4 C00843/26 LS_DisFree_b: bDis6 C00843/27 LS_DisFree_b: bDis7 C00843/28 LS_DisFree_b: bDis8 C00843/29 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B0 C00843/30 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B1 C00843/31...
  • Page 893 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00843 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00843 | Binary inputs I/O level Index: 23732 = 5CB4 C00843/70 LP_MciOut: bState_B9 C00843/71 LP_MciOut: bState_B10 C00843/72 LP_MciOut: bState_B11 C00843/73 LP_MciOut: bState_B12 C00843/74 LP_MciOut: bState_B13 C00843/75...
  • Page 894 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00843 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00843 | Binary inputs I/O level Index: 23732 = 5CB4 C00843/114 LS_ParReadWrite_2: bReadWrite C00843/115 LS_ParReadWrite_3: bExecute C00843/116 LS_ParReadWrite_3: bReadWrite C00843/117 LS_ParReadWrite_4: bExecute C00843/118 LS_ParReadWrite_4: bReadWrite C00843/119...
  • Page 895 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00844 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C00843 | Binary inputs I/O level Index: 23732 = 5CB4 C00843/158 LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn3Window C00843/159 LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn4Window C00843/160 LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn5Window C00843/161 Reserved C00843/162 Reserved C00843/163 Reserved...
  • Page 896 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00866 C00866 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00866 | CAN input words Index: 23709 = 5C9D Display of the 16 bit input values of the CAN interface System bus "CAN on board" Display area (min.
  • Page 897 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00868 C00868 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00868 | CAN output words Index: 23707 = 5C9B Display of the 16 bit output values of the CAN interface System bus "CAN on board" Display area (min.
  • Page 898 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C00876 C00876 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 C00876 | MCI input words Index: 23699 = 5C93 Display of the 16 bit input values of the communication module Display area (min.
  • Page 899 (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded: Info Bit 0 Active Bit set = inversion active ..Bit 15 Active Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00890/1 Inversion of LP_MciIn.wCtrl C00890/2 Inversion of LP_MciOut.wState C00890/3 Inversion of LP_MciIn.bIn2_B0...15 C00890/4 Inversion of LP_MciOut.bOut2_B0...15...
  • Page 900 Note: For control modes with actual speed feedback or SLPSM control mode, this function cannot be used ("not inverted" must always be set). Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 not inverted 1 inverted Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 901 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 Index: 23657 = 5C69 C00918 | SC: Start motor magnetising current From version 10.00.00 Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 90 87 % Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 902 Data type: INTEGER_16 C00940 | L_ConvW numerator Index: 23635 = 5C53 From version 04.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00940/1 L_ConvW_1: Numerator C00940/2 L_ConvW_2: Numerator C00940/3 L_ConvW_3: Numerator C00940/4 L_ConvW_4: Numerator...
  • Page 903 Index: 23625 = 5C49 From version 04.00.00 L_Interpolator_1 FB: Activation of signal interpolation and signal monitoring Selection list 0 Off 1 On Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00950/1 0: Off L_Interpolator_1: Signal interpolation C00950/2 0: Off L_Interpolator_1: Signal monitoring C00950/3 0: Off...
  • Page 904 From version 04.00.00 FB L_Curve_1: Selected curve type Selection list 0 Out = 0 1 Out = In 2 Out = f(In) 3 Out = f(table) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00960/1 1: Out = In L_Curve_1: Function Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 905 • The "Fault" error response takes place, i.e. the motor is shut down immediately. • The error message "OS2: Max. motor speed reached" is entered into the logbook. Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 60000 rpm Read access Write access...
  • Page 906 Selection of the interpolation points (voltage values) for the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with user-definable V/f characteristic (C00006 = "10") Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 600.00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00968/1 400.00 V VFC: Voltage interpol. point 1 C00968/2 320.00 V VFC: Voltage interpol. point 2 C00968/3 240.00 V...
  • Page 907 Integral time constant of the slip regulator for V/f control (VFCplus+encoder) • In general, the time constant should be selected in a range of 20 ms (high dynamics) to 200 (low dynamics). Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 6000.0 100.0 ms...
  • Page 908 C00982 | VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp Index: 23593 = 5C29 From version 10.00.00 Voltage ramp for cancelling V-Sub with energy-saving V/f characteristic control (VFCplusEco) Setting range Lenze setting (min. value | unit | max. value) 5.0 0.8 s Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 909 Index: 23585 = 5C21 C00990 | Flying restart fct.: Activation Switch on/activate flying restart circuit for non-feedback drive systems Flying restart fct. Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off 1 On Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 910 Selection of the starting value and the speed search range for the flying restart function Flying restart fct. Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 0...+n | Start: +10 Hz Search positive speed range (0 ... +n) with a start frequency of +10 Hz 1 -n...0 | Start: -10 Hz...
  • Page 911 = 5C1C From version 10.00.00 Sensorless control for synchronous motor Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 5.00 400.00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00995/1 100.00 % SLPSM: Controlled accelerating current C00995/2 20.00 % SLPSM: Controlled standstill current Read access...
  • Page 912 0 dnOut_p = dnIn1_p 1 dnOut_p = dnIn1_p + dnIn2_p 2 dnOut_p = dnIn1_p - dnIn2_p 3 dnOut_p = dnIn1_p * dnIn2_p 4 dnOut_p = dnIn1_p / dnIn2_p Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01010/1 0: dnOut_p = dnIn1_p L_ArithmetikPhi_1: Function C01010/2...
  • Page 913 C01020 | L_Odometer_1: Memory length Index: 23555 = 5C03 From version 04.00.00 FB L_Odometer_1: No. of measurements Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 1 measurement 2 2 measurements 3 3 measurements 4 4 measurements 5 5 measurements 6 6 measurements...
  • Page 914 From version 11.00.00 FB L_Curve_2: Selected curve type Selection list 0 Out = 0 1 Out = In 2 Out = f(In) 3 Out = f(table) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01025/1 1: Out = In L_Curve_2: Function Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 915 From version 11.00.00 FB L_Curve_3: Selected curve type Selection list 0 Out = 0 1 Out = In 2 Out = f(In) 3 Out = f(table) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01030/1 1: Out = In L_Curve_3: Function Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 916 From version 04.00.00 Symmetrical acceleration/deceleration time for the ramp function generator Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.001 999.999 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01040/1 100.000 s L_SRFG_1: linear ramp time C01040/2 100.000 s L_SRFG_2: linear ramp time...
  • Page 917 Data type: INTEGER_16 C01045 | L_ConvAP 1-3: Numerator/denominator Index: 23530 = 5BEA From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01045/1 L_ConvAP_1: Numerator C01045/2 L_ConvAP_1: Denominator C01045/3 L_ConvAP_2: Numerator C01045/4 L_ConvAP_2: Denominator...
  • Page 918 C01050 | L_CalcDiameter_1: Diameter recalculation From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.001 Rev. 1000.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01050/1 1.000 rev. L_CalcDiameter_1: Diameter recalculation 0 C01050/2 0.100 rev. L_CalcDiameter_1: Diameter recalculation 1 Read access...
  • Page 919 C01053 | L_ProcessCtrl_1: Controller times Index: 23522 = 5BE2 From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 30.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01053/1 0.000 s L_ProcessCtrl_1: Acceleration/deceleration time C01053/2 0.000 s L_ProcessCtrl_1: Filter time constant C01053/3 0.000 s...
  • Page 920 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 Index: 23517 = 5BDD C01058 | L_PosCtrlLin 1-2: Limit stop From version 11.00.00 Selection list 0 deactivated 1 activated Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01058/1 0: Deactivated L_PosCtrlLin_1: Limit stop C01058/2 0: Deactivated L_PosCtrlLin_2: Limit stop Read access...
  • Page 921 C01061 | L_PosCtrlLin 1-2: Traversing speeds Index: 23514 = 5BDA From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -15000 15000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01061/1 199 rpm L_PosCtrlLin_1: Forward motion C01061/2 199 rpm L_PosCtrlLin_1: Return motion C01061/3...
  • Page 922 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C01064 | L_SwitchPoint_1: CenterMode Index: 23511 = 5BD7 From version 11.00.00 Selection list 0 False 1 TRUE Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01064/1 0: FALSE L_SwitchPoint_1: CenterMode 1 C01064/2 0: FALSE L_SwitchPoint_1: CenterMode 2 C01064/3 0: FALSE...
  • Page 923 C01067 | Inversion of gearbox stages Index: 23508 = 5BD4 From version 11.00.00 Selection list 0 not inverted 1 inverted 2 Automatically from MCK Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01067/1 0: Not inverted L_PhiIntegrator_1: Invert. gearbox nSet_v C01067/2 0: Not inverted L_DFSET_1: Invert. gearbox nSet_v C01067/3 0: Not inverted L_CalcDiameter_1: Invert.
  • Page 924 C01072 | L_DFSET_1: Multiplier - angular trimming Index: 23503 = 5BCF From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -20000 20000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01072/1 L_DFSET_1: Multiplier - angular trimming Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer...
  • Page 925 Index: 23499 = 5BCB From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 999.900 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01076/1 1.000 s L_DFRFG_1: Acceleration and deceleration time C01076/2 0.000 s L_DFRFG_1: Deceleration time for quick stop Read access...
  • Page 926 From version 04.00.00 Parameter change-over: Selection of the activation method Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 by Execute The writing of the parameter list is activated by a FALSE/TRUE edge at the bExecute input. 1 by Input Select...
  • Page 927 Parameter change-over: Parameter for entry 1 ... 32 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 16000.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01085/1 0.000 Parameter for entries 1 ... 32 • Format: <code number>.<subcode number> C01085/... • Examples: "12.000" = C00012; "26.001" = C00026/1...
  • Page 928 Parameter values - value set 4 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01089/1 Parameter values - value set 4 • Parameter values for the parameters defined in C01089/... C01085/1 ... 32.
  • Page 929 100 100 ms 200 200 ms 500 500 ms 1000 1 s 2000 2 s 5000 5 s 10000 10 s Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01091/1 0: 0 (by Execute) LS_ParReadWrite_1: Cycle time C01091/2 0: 0 (by Execute) LS_ParReadWrite_2: Cycle time...
  • Page 930 FB. Selection list 0 No arithmetic 1 In16Bit: LW=+/-32767 2 In16Bit: HW=+/-; LW=0..65535 3 In32Bit: HW_LW=+/-2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01093/1 0: no arithmetic LS_ParReadWrite_1: Arithmetic mode C01093/2 0: no arithmetic LS_ParReadWrite_2: Arithmetic mode...
  • Page 931 = 5BB8 From version 06.00.00 Arithmetic function: Factor (denominator) for internal conversion in arithmetic modes 1 ... 3. Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01095/1 LS_ParReadWrite_1: Denominator C01095/2 LS_ParReadWrite_2: Denominator C01095/3 LS_ParReadWrite_3: Denominator...
  • Page 932 Selection of the signal source for device synchronisation • Basically, only one source is allowed to synchronise the drive. Synchronisation of the internal time base Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off Synchronisation off 1 CAN on board Synchronisation via CAN bus...
  • Page 933 • If synchronisation is not reached, select a higher correction constant. • The optimum setting depends on quartz precision and must be determined empirically if required. Synchronisation of the internal time base Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 1 100ns 2 200ns 3 300ns...
  • Page 934 Bit 11 bIn4 Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01130/1 LS_RetainData: Selection bSetRetain_1 C01130/2 LS_RetainData: Selection bSetRetain_2 C01130/3 3840 LS_RetainData: Selection bSetRetain_3 C01130/4 4095 LS_RetainData: Selection bLoadParams Read access...
  • Page 935 Data type: INTEGER_32 C01132 | LS_RetainData: 32Bit data Index: 23443 = 5B93 From version 11.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01132/1 LS_RetainData: dnValue1 C01132/2 LS_RetainData: dnValue2 C01132/3 LS_RetainData: dnValue3 C01132/4 LS_RetainData: dnValue4...
  • Page 936 C01139 | L_Transient 1-4: Pulse duration Index: 23436 = 5B8C From version 04.00.00 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 60.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01139/1 0.000 s L_Transient_1: Pulse duration C01139/2 0.000 s L_Transient_2: Pulse duration C01139/3 0.000 s...
  • Page 937 C01201 | MCK: Cycle From version 06.00.00 Cycle for Modulo measuring system • When the cycle is set to 0 units (Lenze setting), the traversing range is unlimited (classical measuring system). Activation of the Modulo measuring system Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.0000...
  • Page 938 • Entry of the gearbox factor as numerator/denominator ratio, with numerator = motor speed and denominator = position encoder speed. Machine parameter Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01203/1 MCK: iG: Numerator (motor speed) C01203/2 MCK: iG: Denominator (encoder speed) Read access...
  • Page 939 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C01210 C01210 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_32 C01210 | MCK: Current positions Index: 23365 = 5B45 Display of current position data of the Motion Control Kernel Display range (min.
  • Page 940 Following error monitoring system Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.0000 units 214748.0000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01215/1 0.0000 units MCK: Following error limit 1 • First limit of the maximum following error for monitoring and response activation.
  • Page 941 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C01218 | PosFollower: Setting Index: 23357 = 5B3D Settings for "Position follower" mode Position follower Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x00 0xFF 0x0C (decimal: 12) Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info Bit 0 Speed FF control.: nSpeedSetValue_a "1"...
  • Page 942 = 5B3A Selection of the homing mode. Homing Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 6 >_Rn_>_TP Positive direction - via home mark (neg. edge) - continuing in positive direction - to TP 7 <_Rn_<_TP Negative direction - via home mark (neg. edge) - continuing in negative direction - to TP 8 >_TP...
  • Page 943 Speeds for reference search/homing Homing Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.0000 unit/s 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01224/1 720.0000 unit/s MCK: Ref. initial speed • Starting speed for approaching the pre-stop signals. C01224/2 180.0000 unit/s MCK: Ref. search speed •...
  • Page 944 Homing Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 unit 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01227/1 0.0000 unit MCK: Ref. offset reference degree • Relative traverse path by which the drive traverses after detection of the reference initiator.
  • Page 945 C01230 | Manual jog: Setting Index: 23345 = 5B31 Settings for "Manual jog" mode Manual jog Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x00 0xFF 0x00 (decimal: 0) Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info Bit 0 Breakpoints 1..4 on...
  • Page 946 • Setting "0 s" ≡ no rounding Manual jog Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 10.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01233/1 0.000 s Manual jog: S-ramp time • S-ramp time for the manual speed ramps. Read access...
  • Page 947 Accelerations for position follower Position follower Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 units/s2 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01237/1 720.0000 units/s2 Pos follower: Sync. accel. • Acceleration for ramp-up to synchronisation speed. C01237/2 720.0000 units/s2 Pos follower: Sync. decel.
  • Page 948 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C01240 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_32 C01240 | MCK: Control word Index: 23335 = 5B27 Bit 7 ReleaseLimitSwitch Control bit for retracting the hardware limit positions Bit 8 HomStartStop Control bit for start/stop homing Bit 9 HomSetPos Control bit for setting of home position...
  • Page 949 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C01241 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_32 C01240 | MCK: Control word Index: 23335 = 5B27 Bit 24 ProfileNo_Bit0 Active positioning profile number - control bit 0 Bit 25 ProfileNo_Bit1 Active positioning profile number - control bit 1 Bit 26 ProfileNo_Bit2 Active positioning profile number - control bit 2...
  • Page 950 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C01242 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_32 C01241 | MCK: Status word Index: 23334 = 5B26 Bit 13 HomPosAvailable Status bit - home position known • "1" ≡ The home position has been detected and is known in the drive.
  • Page 951 From version 02.00.00 Timing for various MCK functions Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01244/1 100 ms MCK: Dwell time - target position • Time expiring after reaching the setpoint position for positioning processes and enabling the actual position detection in the target position window.
  • Page 952 Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.0000 units 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01245/1 1.0000 units MCK: Window target position • Window around the target position for comparison with the actual position to see whether the drive is in target.
  • Page 953 Index: 23280 = 5AF0 From version 04.00.00 Selection of the position to be provided at the dnPosOut_p output of the FB L_MckStateInterface Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 dnPosIn_p 1 Current feed 2 dnSetPos_p 3 dnActPos_p 4 dnDeltaPos_p...
  • Page 954 = 5AEE Selection of the alternative function for bit 16 (PosExecute) in the MCK control word Alternative functions for "PosExecute" control bit Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x00 0xFF 0x03 (decimal: 3) Value is bit-coded: (...
  • Page 955 Change to the "Homing" mode 3 ManualJog Change to the "Manual jog" mode 4 Positioning Change to the "Positioning" mode Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01298/1 1: Follower MCK operating mode at profile no. 0 • Selection of the operating mode for profile 0 at L_MckCtrlInterface_1.
  • Page 956 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C01300 C01300 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C01300 | Profile data: Positioning mode Index: 23275 = 5AEB Selection of the positioning mode for profiles 1 ... 15 Profile entry Selection list Info 1 Absolute (shortest path)
  • Page 957 Parameter reference Parameter list | C01301 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C01300 | Profile data: Positioning mode Index: 23275 = 5AEB Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01300/1 1: absolute (beeline) Profiles 1 ... 15: Positioning mode C01300/... C01300/15 Read access...
  • Page 958 Selection of the decelerations for profiles 1 ... 15 Profile entry Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 unit/s2 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01304/1 720.0000 unit/s2 Profiles 1 ... 15: Deceleration C01304/... C01304/15 Read access Write access...
  • Page 959 Selection of the sequence profile numbers for profiles 1 ... 15 • For profile linkage Profile entry Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01307/1 Profiles 1 ... 15: Sequence profile C01307/... C01307/15 Read access...
  • Page 960 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01501/1 0: No Reaction Resp. to MCI connection error • Response to a communication error of the attached communication module. C01501/2 0: No Reaction Resp.
  • Page 961 C01671 | L_ComparePhi 1-5: Hysteresis Index: 22904 = 5978 Hysteresis for the comparison function Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Incr. 1073741824 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01671/1 0 incr. L_ComparePhi_1: Hysteresis C01671/2 0 incr. L_ComparePhi_2: Hysteresis C01671/3 0 incr.
  • Page 962 C01902 | Diagnostics X6: Max. baud rate Maximally permissible baud rate in the standard device after determination of the baud rate at the diagnostic interface X6 Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 192 19.200 Bd 384 38.400 Bd 576 57.600 Bd 750 75.000 Bd...
  • Page 963 Selection of the operating mode for holding brake control Holding brake control Selection list Info (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Brake control off No holding brake is used. Internal control is switched off. 11 Manually controlled The holding brake is released and closed via a control bit in the MCK control word.
  • Page 964 Revised behaviour from version 11.00.00: • "1" ≡ The ramp time of the effective acceleration of the ramp function generator (L_NSet_1) is used (Lenze setting). • "0" ≡ As before, the ramp time set in C02610/1 is used.
  • Page 965 Holding brake control Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02589/1 100 ms Holding brake: Application time • Time in which the holding brake is completely applied from the beginning of control and in which the controller is inhibited.
  • Page 966 • The setting made here is only effective if bit 6 "SyncRampe L_NSet_1" in C02582 is set to "0". • In the Lenze setting of C02582 (Bit 6 = "1"), the ramp time of the effective acceleration of the ramp function generator (L_NSet_1) is used.
  • Page 967 Traversing with setpoints through resulting blocking zones is executed with the ramp set in C02610/2. Speed Min/Max Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02611/1 199.99 % MCK: Pos. max. speed • Upper limit of the speed setpoint limitation in positive direction of rotation.
  • Page 968 C02810 | TP: Edge selection Index: 21765 = 5505 From version 06.00.00 Touch-probe detection Selection list 0 Off 1 Rising 2 Falling 3 Rising and falling Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02810/1 0: Off Reserved C02810/2 0: Off Reserved C02810/3 0: Off TPDigIn3: Edge selection...
  • Page 969 C02812 | TP: Position offset Index: 21763 = 5503 From version 06.00.00 Touch-probe detection Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 units 214748.3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02812/1 0.0000 units Reserved C02812/2 0.0000 units Reserved C02812/3 0.0000 units TPDigIn3: Pos offset C02812/4 0.0000 units...
  • Page 970 C02815 | TP: Position source Index: 21760 = 5500 From version 06.00.00 Touch-probe detection Selection list 0 Position encoder actual value 1 Pos DigIn1/2 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02815/1 0: Position encoder actual value Reserved C02815/2 0: Position encoder actual value Reserved C02815/3...
  • Page 971 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C02817 C02817 Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_32 C02817 | TP: TouchProbe position Index: 21758 = 54FE From version 06.00.00 Touch-probe detection Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) -214748.3647 units 214748.3647...
  • Page 972 80 20.0 ms 88 22.0 ms 96 24.0 ms 104 26.0 ms 112 28.0 ms 120 30.0 ms 128 32.0 ms Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02830/1 1: 0.25 ms DI1 ... DI7: Debounce time C02830/... C02830/7 Read access Write access...
  • Page 973 Starting and comparison values for digital count inputs Use DI1(6) as counting input Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Incr. 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02840/1 0 incr. CountIn1: Starting value C02840/2 65535 incr. CountIn1: Comparison value C02840/3 0 incr.
  • Page 974 Output of the encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input Selection list 0 Loading with level 1 Loading with edge 2 Loading with level + reset Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02844/1 0: Loading with level FreqIn12: PosIn function Read access...
  • Page 975 Data type: UNSIGNED_8 C02859 | PSM: Activate Lss saturation char. Index: 21716 = 54D4 From version 10.00.00 Correction via saturation characteristic Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Off 1 On Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer...
  • Page 976 • Stands out due to increased accuracy of the determined motor parameters. • Also supports synchronous motors and asynchronous motors with a power of more than 11 kW. • Duration approx. 80 s Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02867/1 0: automatic Motor parameter identification: Process Read access...
  • Page 977 Index: 21703 = 54C7 From version 11.00.00 Pole position identification without motion Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02872/1 PLI without motion: Adaptation of time duration Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP...
  • Page 978 = 54C4 From version 11.00.00 Pole position identification without motion Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -100 ° Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02875/1 0 ° PLI without motion: Adaptation of ident angle Read access Write access CINH...
  • Page 979 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list | C02996 C02996 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_32 C02996 | FB display InputOutput2 Index: 21579 = 544B This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Firmware ≤...

  • Page 980: Selection Lists For Connection Parameters

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list 14.2.1 Selection lists for connection parameters 14.2.1.1 Selection list - analog signals This selection list is relevant for the Selection list - analog signals following parameters: 1117 LA_TabPos_nGPSignalOut1_a 1118 LA_TabPos_nGPSignalOut2_a Parameter 1119 LA_TabPos_nGPSignalOut3_a C00410...
  • Page 981 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - analog signals Selection list - analog signals 16015 DIGIN_wCountIn1_HW 20005 LS_ParFix_wDriveCtrl 16016 DIGIN_nFreqIn12_a 20010 LS_ParFree_nC472_1_a 16017 DIGIN_nFreqIn12_v 20011 LS_ParFree_nC472_2_a 16018 DIGIN_wCountIn6_LW 20012 LS_ParFree_nC472_3_a 16019 DIGIN_wCountIn6_HW 20013 LS_ParFree_nC472_4_a 16020 DIGIN_nFreqIn67_a 20014 LS_ParFree_nC472_5_a 16021 DIGIN_nFreqIn67_v...
  • Page 982 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - analog signals Selection list - analog signals 20061 LS_ParFree_nC472_12_a 20113 LS_ParFree_wC477_26 20062 LS_ParFree_nC472_13_a 20114 LS_ParFree_wC477_27 20063 LS_ParFree_nC472_14_a 20115 LS_ParFree_wC477_28 20064 LS_ParFree_nC472_15_a 20116 LS_ParFree_wC477_29 20065 LS_ParFree_nC472_16_a 20117 LS_ParFree_wC477_30 20066 LS_ParFree_nC476_1_a 20118 LS_ParFree_wC477_31 20067 LS_ParFree_nC476_2_a...
  • Page 983 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - analog signals Selection list - analog signals 32211 Reserved 36055 L_NLim_2_nOut_a 34900 MCTRL_OszCh1 36056 L_NLim_2_wState 34901 MCTRL_OszCh2 36057 L_OffsetGain_Out_3 34902 MCTRL_OszCh3 36058 L_PT1_2_nOut_a 34903 MCTRL_OszCh4 36059 L_PT1_3_nOut_a 34904 MCTRL_Status1 36064 L_SampleHold_1_nOut_a 34905 MCTRL_Status2...
  • Page 984 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - analog signals Selection list - analog signals 36116 L_FixSet_w_2_wOut 42026 LA_nCtrl_In_wFreeIn2 36117 L_FixSet_w_2_wSelect 42027 LA_nCtrl_In_wFreeIn3 36120 L_CalcDiameter_nDiameter_a 42028 LA_nCtrl_In_wFreeIn4 36121 L_CalcDiameter_nReziprDiameter_a 42100 LA_TabPos_In_wCanDriveControl 36122 L_CalcDiameter_nNReel_v 42101 LA_TabPos_In_wMciDriveControl 36123 L_CalcDiameter_nDMin_a 42102 LA_TabPos_In_nTorqueMotLim_a 36124 L_ProcessCtrl_nOut_a...
  • Page 985 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - analog signals 42223 LA_SwitchPos_In_wFreeIn3 42224 LA_SwitchPos_In_wFreeIn4 Firmware ≤ 11.00 - DMS 6.0 EN - 10/2011 Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com...

  • Page 986: Selection List - Digital Signals

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list 14.2.1.2 Selection list - digital signals This selection list is relevant for the Selection list - digital signals following parameters: 1109 LA_TabPos_bMBrakeReleased 1110 LA_TabPos_bHomeDone Parameter 1111 LA_TabPos_bHomePosAvailable C00411 L_SignalMonitor_b: Signal sources 1112 LA_TabPos_bProfileDone C00621 System connection list: Bool...
  • Page 987 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals Selection list - digital signals 1222 LA_SwitchPos_bGPSignalOut4 16044 CAN2_bIn1_B15 1228 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut1 16045 CAN3_bIn1_B0 1229 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut2 16046 CAN3_bIn1_B1 1230 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut3 16047 CAN3_bIn1_B2 1231 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut4 16048 CAN3_bIn1_B3 1232 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut5 16049 CAN3_bIn1_B4 1233 LA_SwitchPos_bFreeOut6...
  • Page 988 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals Selection list - digital signals 16096 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed1 20019 bC470_19 16097 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed2 20020 bC470_20 16098 LS_Keypad_bMPotEnable 20021 bC470_21 16099 LS_Keypad_bMPotUp 20022 bC470_22 16100 LS_Keypad_bMPotDown 20023 bC470_23 16101 DigIn_bPosIn12_State 20024 bC470_24 16110 LS_ParReadWrite_1_bDone...
  • Page 989 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals Selection list - digital signals 32024 MCTRL_bHlgStop 36012 L_DigitalDelay_Out_1 32025 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bImpActive 36013 L_Compare_Out_1 32026 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bClampActive 36014 L_Compare_Out_2 32027 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bMainsFault 36015 L_Compare_Out_3 32028 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bNmaxForFChop 36016 L_Nset_RfgEq0_1 32029 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bShortCircuit 36017 L_DigitalLogic_1_bOut 32030 LS_DeviceMonitor_MCTRL_bEarthFault...
  • Page 990 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals Selection list - digital signals 36068 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit1 36120 L_MckStateInterface_1_bBusy 36069 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit2 36121 L_MckStateInterface_1_bDone 36070 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit3 36122 L_MckStateInterface_1_bHomingPosAvailable 36071 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit4 36123 L_MckStateInterface_1_bHomingDone 36072 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit5 36124 L_MckStateInterface_1_bDwellTime 36073 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit6 36125 L_MckStateInterface_1_bInTarget 36074 L_ConvWordToBits_1_bBit7...
  • Page 991 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals Selection list - digital signals 42012 LA_NCtrl_bJogRamp1 42121 LA_TabPos_In_bHomeResetPosition 42013 LA_NCtrl_bJogRamp2 42122 LA_TabPos_In_bHomeMark 42014 LA_NCtrl_bJogRamp4 42123 LA_TabPos_In_bPosSetProfilePosition 42015 LA_NCtrl_bJogRamp8 42124 LA_TabPos_In_bPosSetActualPosition 42017 LA_NCtrl_bMPOTInAct 42125 LA_TabPos_In_bPosExecute 42018 LA_NCtrl_bMPOTUp 42126 LA_TabPos_In_bPosFinishTarget 42019 LA_NCtrl_bMPOTDown...
  • Page 992 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - digital signals 42217 LA_SwitchPos_bJogCtrlSlowDown3 42218 LA_SwitchPos_bJogCtrlStop3 42219 LA_SwitchPos_bJogSpeed4 42220 LA_SwitchPos_bJogSpeed8 42221 LA_SwitchPos_bJogRamp1 42222 LA_SwitchPos_bJogRamp2 42223 LA_SwitchPos_bJogRamp4 42224 LA_SwitchPos_bJogRamp8 42225 LA_SwitchPos_bMBrakeRelease 42226 LA_SwitchPos_bGPAnalogSwitchSet 42227 LA_SwitchPos_bGPDigitalDelayIn 42228 LA_SwitchPos_bGPLogicIn1 42229 LA_SwitchPos_bGPLogicIn2 42230 LA_SwitchPos_bGPLogicIn3 42231 LA_SwitchPos_bGPDFlipFlop_InD 42232 LA_SwitchPos_bGPDFlipFlop_InClk...

  • Page 993: Selection List - Angle Signals

    8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list 14.2.1.3 Selection list - angle signals This selection list is relevant for the Selection list - angle signals following parameters: 20011 dnC479_4 20012 dnC479_5 Parameter 20013 dnC479_6 C00622 System connection list: Angle 20014 dnC479_7 C00712 LA_TabPos: phi connection list...
  • Page 994 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Parameter list Selection list - angle signals Selection list - angle signals 36052 L_LimitPhi_3_Out_p 36119 L_CalcDiameter_dwDiameter 36060 L_OffsetGainParPhi_1_Out_p 42005 LA_NCtrl_dnFreeIn1_p 36061 L_OffsetGainParPhi_2_Out_p 42006 LA_NCtrl_dnFreeIn2_p 36066 L_PhaseIntK_1_dnOut_p 42100 LA_TabPos_In_dnPosProfilePosition 36067 L_PhaseIntK_2_dnOut_p 42101 LA_TabPos_In_dnFreeIn1_p 36070 L_ArithmetikPhi_2_Out_p 42102 LA_TabPos_In_dnFreeIn2_p 36071 L_ArithmetikPhi_3_Out_p...

  • Page 995: Table Of Attributes

    Name Parameter short text (display text) Text Index Index under which the parameter is addressed. 24575 - Lenze code number Is only required for access via a bus The subindex for array variables corresponds to the system. 5FFF - Lenze code number Lenze subcode number.
  • Page 996 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Table of attributes Code Name Index Data Access Factor CINH C00027 AINx: Gain 24548 5FE4 INTEGER_32 10000 C00028 AINx: Input voltage 24547 5FE3 INTEGER_16 C00029 AINx: Input current 24546 5FE2 INTEGER_16 C00033 AINx: Output value 24542 5FDE...
  • Page 997 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Table of attributes Code Name Index Data Access Factor CINH C00103 Add. deceleration time x 24472 5F98 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C00104 Position control at quick stop 24471 5F97 UNSIGNED_16 C00105 Decel. time - quick stop 24470 5F96 UNSIGNED_32...
  • Page 998 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Table of attributes Code Name Index Data Access Factor CINH C00189 Resp. to too frequent AutoFailReset 24386 5F42 UNSIGNED_8 C00190 L_NSet_1: Setpoint arithmetic 24385 5F41 UNSIGNED_8 C00199 Description data 24376 5F38 VISIBLE_STRING [24] C00200 Firmware product type 24375...
  • Page 999 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Table of attributes Code Name Index Data Access Factor CINH C00341 CAN management - error 24234 5EAA UNSIGNED_16 configuration C00342 CAN decoupling PDOInOut 24233 5EA9 UNSIGNED_16 C00343 LP_CanIn decoupling value 24232 5EA8 UNSIGNED_16 C00344 LP_CanOut decoupling value...
  • Page 1000 8400 HighLine C | Reference manual Parameter reference Table of attributes Code Name Index Data Access Factor CINH C00446 FreqInxx_nOut_a 24129 5E41 INTEGER_16 C00447 DigOut decoupling 24128 5E40 UNSIGNED_16 C00448 DigOut decoupling value 24127 5E3F UNSIGNED_16 C00449 FreqInxx_dnOut_p 24126 5E3E INTEGER_32 C00461 Remote: Acceleration/deceleration...

This manual is also suitable for:

L-force highline e84avhc series

Table of Contents

Save PDF